Page 1 Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety (Page 14)" before using this product. KX-NS1000: PCMPR Software File Version 004.40000 or later Document Version 2016-03...
Page 2 Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to program this PBX using Web Maintenance Console. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Page 3: Document Version
• Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some areas, or for some PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. • Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ....................13 Introduction ........................14 1.1.1 For Your Safety ......................14 1.1.2 Introduction ........................17 1.1.3 Entering Characters .......................18 PC Programming ......................19 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ................19 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ................23 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ..........28 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types ....................29...
Page 5 Table of Contents 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS ...............91 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear ..................92 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group ..................93 Tool—Extension List View .....................94 Tool—Import ........................95 Tool—Export ........................100 Tool—Screen Customize ....................101 Tool—UM Data Backup ....................102 6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup ..............103 6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ..............104 Tool—UM Data Restore ....................105...
Page 6 Table of Contents 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert ..................153 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis ...............155 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email .................156 Utility—Command ......................157 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command ................157 7.8.2 Utility—Command—Router Command ................157 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customization ............158 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording ..............160 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting ........160 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting .........161 7.10.3...
Page 7 Table of Contents 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property ..377 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property ..379 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property .....390 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property ....394 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property ..405 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property ..408 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—...
Page 8 Table of Contents 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card ..........621 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group ............623 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group ............624 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings ......624 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ....630 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification ....631 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialing Plan ........637 11.1.4.1...
Page 9 Table of Contents 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button ....743 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ......................755 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button ......756 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send ..........................757 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table ....758 12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station ..........759 12.2.1...
Page 10 Table of Contents 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network ...........867 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table ..........868 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission ....872 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) ....876 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table .........878 17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralized UM/VM Unit .....880 18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO &...
Page 11 Table of Contents 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group ......1044 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement ......................1046 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters ........1048 25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ..........1079 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings .................1080 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ..........1083 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ..............1084 27 Router Configuration .................1089...
Page 12 Table of Contents 29.1.2 PCMPR Software File Version 003.2xxxx ..............1236 29.1.3 PCMPR Software File Version 004.0xxxx ..............1236 29.1.4 PCMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx ..............1237 29.1.5 PCMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx ..............1239 29.1.6 PCMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx ..............1239 29.1.7 PCMPR Software File Version 004.4xxxx ..............1240 Feature Programming References ............1241 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 13: Overview
Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 14: Introduction
1.1.1 For Your Safety 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 For Your Safety To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions. The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is operated or handled improperly.
Page 15 Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center. CAUTION •...
Page 16 1.1.1 For Your Safety • There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret.
Page 17: Introduction
1.1.2 Introduction 1.1.2 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customize the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming".
Page 18: Entering Characters
1.1.3 Entering Characters 1.1.3 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Table 1 (Standard) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 19: Pc Programming
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC. This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.
Page 20 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console PC Specifications (for programming) The following are recommended specifications for PCs used for programming. For details about programming in Off-line mode, see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode. Recommended Specification 3.2 GHz Intel Core™ 2 Duo processor or comparable CPU ®...
Page 21 – http://kx-ns1000. Note • If entering "http://kx-ns1000.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown. • If connecting using 223.0.0.1 takes a long time, configure a static IP address for the PC. LAN or VPN connection: Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console port number into the address bar.
Page 22 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console • If the PBX has been set up using the Easy Setup Wizard, PBX system programming can be performed. To perform programming, enter the login name and password according to your status and authorization level. For details about the differences between levels of authorization, see 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.
Page 23: Pc Programming Using Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode PC Programming is performed by connecting to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console, which is also known as On-line mode. However, as certain programming requires installed cards to be set to out of service (OUS), or requires system settings to be changed, some programming cannot be performed while the PBX is in use.
Page 24 To convert a KX-TDE/KX-NCP’s system data file to KX-NS1000 KX-TDE/KX-NCP system data can be converted for use with the KX-NS1000 by using the Database Converter. In the Program Launcher, click Database Converter. The Database Converter screen will be displayed in your PC.
Page 25 PBX. When you use the following procedure to open a system file created using a previous version of the KX-NS1000 software, a confirmation screen will be displayed asking whether you want to convert the system data to the latest software version.
Page 26 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Additional display language files may be made available. To add a display language not listed in the language selection menu, select Additional language, and then click Browse to specify the language file. After specifying a language file, click OK to change to the selected language. VoIP Test Tool Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool.
Page 27 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Notice • If the PC running the Off-line Web Maintenance Console is shut down, the Web browser is closed, or the user logs out, any changes that have not been saved will be lost. Be sure to regularly save data while programming.
Page 28: Editing And Printing Terminal Labels In Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions and DSS consoles. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to your PC.
Page 29: Pbx Configuration Types
Multiple KX-NS series PBXs can be connected together in a configuration called a One-look network. One KX-NS1000 PBX serves as the Master unit, and other KX-NS series PBXs connect to the Master unit as Slave units. Slave unit PBXs receive settings and operation instructions from the Master unit PBX. With this configuration, it is easy to make network-wide changes by performing programming at only one PBX.
Page 30 One-look network. Programming is still performed by logging in to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console. A KX-NS1000 PBX (including the Master unit of a One-look network) can also connect to other PBXs using standards such as H.323. For details about other networking configurations, refer to 14.1.5 One-look Network—IP Network Type Comparison in the Feature Manual.
Page 31: One-Look Networking Survivability
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability A One-look network can be configured so that even if a site’s main PBX fails or is otherwise disconnected from the network, operation of the One-look Network as a whole continues. One-look Networking Survivability provides the following features: •...
Page 32 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 33: Introduction Of Web Maintenance Console
Section 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to program the PBX. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 34: Introduction
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts User account levels Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorization. The Installer level is the highest authorization level.
Page 35 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts Level Login Name Password Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). For an initialized PBX that has not yet been set up, the default Installer level password is "1234". You will be prompted to choose a new password for the Installer level account when the Easy Setup Wizard is run (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 36: Access Levels
2.1.2 Access Levels 2.1.2 Access Levels Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the account and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for example: "This option is only available at Installer level."...
Page 37 2.1.2 Access Levels Off-line On-line Menu Option Import®SIP Extension ü ü ü ü Import®V-IPGW16 GW Settings Import®V-IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü ü ü Import®V-SIPGW16 Settings Import®V-SIPGW16 Provider ü ü ü ü ü ü Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID Export®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü...
Page 38 2.1.2 Access Levels Off-line On-line Menu Option File Transfer PC to PBX ü File Transfer PBX to PC ü File View ü File Delete ü Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü Error Log ü...
Page 39 2.1.2 Access Levels Off-line On-line Menu Option Router Command ü UM – System Prompts Customization ü ü Automatic Two-way Recording ü ü ü ü UM - System Maintenance ü ü Flash ROM ID Information ü Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 40: Logging In To Web Maintenance Console
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialized, factory default state, you must log in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 41: Easy Setup Wizard
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialized, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard for that PBX will launch automatically.
Page 42: Software Interface
2.1.5 Software Interface 2.1.5 Software Interface This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface. Main Window When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the main window is displayed. For information about connecting to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console. The main window of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below: Logged in Account Level The logged in account level is displayed.
Page 43 2.1.5 Software Interface Button Description Clicking this button will display the Setup Screen tree view items. From the Setup Screen, you can: • Configure PBX hardware and virtual cards • Program settings for extensions and call handling • Configure network settings and auxiliary PBX functions Setup Screen •...
Page 44 2.1.5 Software Interface Maintenance Screen Tree View Items Item Primary Functions Status • Check the status of the PBX’s system hardware • Check the status of PBX equipment (PSs, CSs, UPS, etc.) • Check the status of extensions used by the Unified Messaging system For details, see Section 4 Status.
Page 45 2.1.5 Software Interface Item Primary Functions Network Service • Configure server and client features for the PBX • Configure connections settings and network security For details, see Section 28 Network Service. Site Selection Menu When you are logged in to the Master unit of a One-look network and you are viewing programming screens in the tree view, a site selection drop-down menu is displayed with each PBX site’s name and ID number.
Page 46 2.1.5 Software Interface Click Copy. The programming item(s) selected in Items for the copy source specified in Copy From will be copied to the destination(s) specified in Copy To. Individual items can also be copied and pasted in a manner similar to other software programs. Press "Ctrl"+"c"...
Page 47: Card Status
2.1.6 Card Status 2.1.6 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction).
Page 48: Extension Number Setting
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button.
Page 49 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting Default Not stored Value Range Selected extensions Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 50: Logout
2.2 Logout 2.2 Logout To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary memory (DRAM) of the PBX to the Storage Memory Card. To logout Click the button.
Page 51: Frequently Asked Questions (Faq)
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to program the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics: Title Description Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console. Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Page 52 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Card Status The status of a new card will not change to "INS". • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or CO lines exceed the maximum supported by the PBX? •...
Page 53 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown Forced De-registration of 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station. I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old extension number.
Page 54 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Select 3-digits for Select the default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup Wizard. If you want to change to a 3-digit extension numbering plan after the PBX system is already running using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the procedure below.
Page 55 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number? • Perform the following steps: Clear the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. No. of Additional Digits to "None". Click Apply. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
Page 56 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: • A feature number • An extension •...
Page 57 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • The following setting data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card, so will be deleted when the PBX is initialized. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory. • Advice of Charge (AOC) •...
Page 58 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • CO line calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a particular COS in each time mode.
Page 59 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Perform the following steps: On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, from the ICD Group No. drop-down list, select the group you want to modify. The ICD group must have an extension number set. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the Extension Number column.
Page 60 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 61: Web Maintenance Console Home Screen
Section 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen This section explains how to setup the main PBX and other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 62: Home Screen
3.1 Home Screen 3.1 Home Screen The Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console provides an overall view of your One-look network, and allows you select a PBX to perform programming, or add a PBX to your One-look network. The Home Screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console.
Page 63 3.1 Home Screen Icon Description List View Click this button to view the following information in a list format: • System Capacity Selection This field indicates the type that is selected for System Capacity Selection in Easy Setup Wizard. For details, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard" in the Installation Manual.
Page 64 3.1 Home Screen These 15 icons represent Slave unit PBXs under the control of the Master unit PBX. Units that have been registered display a unit name and are colored in. Remaining available unit positions are shown as grayed out. You can right-click a registered PBX and select Maintenance, Setup, or Direct Login for that PBX. Selecting Direct Login will display the Login screen for that PBX.
Page 65 3.1 Home Screen Icon Description Offline Master Unit The Master unit is currently not connected to other PBXs in the One-look network and is not operating as the Master unit. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 66: Home Screen-Add Site Wizard
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard The Add Site Wizard, which is run from the Home Screen, will add KX-NS series PBXs (KX-NS700/ KX-NS1000) to your One-look network as Slave units. Note • The PBX to be added must have been configured as a Slave unit using the Easy Setup Wizard. See 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
Page 67 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard A confirmation screen will be displayed. Click OK to continue. A removal status screen will be displayed. Each selected PBX will be removed one at a time. After each successful removal, a confirmation message will appear. Click Continue to proceed to the next PBX to remove.
Page 68 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 69: Status
Section 4 Status This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 70: Status-Equipment Status
From the drop-down list, select the amount of remaining battery level for when to initiate PBX shutdown procedures. For more information about setting up a UPS system, refer to 4.13 Starting the KX-NS1000—Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) in the Installation Manual.
Page 71: Status-Equipment Status-Cs Information
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information 4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description...
Page 72: Status-Equipment Status-Ps Information
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No.
Page 73: Status-Equipment Status-Um Port Status
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways: •...
Page 74: Status-Equipment Status-Usb
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount button. • Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device from the PBX, click Unmount.
Page 75: System Control
Section 5 System Control This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen when programming using Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 76: System Control-Program Update
The program files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update feature. Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognized by the KX-NS1000. Hardware that can be updated using Program Update...
Page 77 5.1 System Control—Program Update Program Type Target of Update File Name Firmware for PFPGA PFPGA KX-NS1000 PAPMIRNR PAPMIRNR PARMVDNR PARMVDNR PARMIREP PARMIREP PARMVDEP PARMVDEP PC300NR PC300NR PC300EP PC300EP PC300DAG PC300DAG Unified Messaging PFAX PFAX (UM) Program CS Programs (PS CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable Station...
Page 78: System Control-Program Update-Download Program File
PC or a USB memory device. • When using an FTP server with this feature, the program files to be downloaded to the KX-NS1000 PBX must be named on the FTP server in a specific way that includes the version number.
Page 79 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File Automatic The Master unit is set to automatically check an FTP server for updated program files. If an update is available, the Master unit will download the data. The downloaded software is then sent over the One-look network from the Master unit to all Slave units.
Page 80: System Control-Program Update-Update Program File
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Once updated program files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to update the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a specified time, or the update process can be carried out manually.
Page 81 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Click on another PBX site tab to program another PBX in the One-look network as required, and then repeat steps 1–3. Perform settings for each PBX in the One-look network as required. Click Execute. The program files are updated to the specified PBXs.
Page 82: System Control-Program Update-Plug And Update
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs, IP-CSs, and certain PSs to be automatically updated to the latest software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version number of the system software stored on the Master unit is compared to the system software currently in the device, after the device has been registered to the PBX.
Page 83: System Control-Moh
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install 5.2 System Control—MOH 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time. In the Select column, specify which PBX sites will install the sound file as an MOH file.
Page 84: System Control-Moh-Delete
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete 5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved in all BGM numbers.
Page 85: System Control-Moh-Status / Backup
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. From Site No., select a PBX from which to download MOH files. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed.
Page 86: System Control-Fax Card
5.3 System Control—FAX Card 5.3 System Control—FAX Card This function is used to restart the optional FAX Card after it is installed in the PBX. For details about installing the FAX Card, refer to 4.3.4 FAX Card (KX-NS0106) in the Installation Manual. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 87: System Control-System Reset
5.4 System Control—System Reset 5.4 System Control—System Reset When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console. When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost. A backup should be performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost.
Page 88: System Control-System Shutdown
5.5 System Control—System Shutdown 5.5 System Control—System Shutdown In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown. When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost.
Page 89: Tool
Section 6 Tool This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 90: Tool-System Data Backup
USB cable must first be removed, then reconnected after the backup to USB has been completed. For details about the connection between the UPS and the PBX, refer to 4.13 Starting the KX-NS1000—Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) in the Installation Manual. Select the system data items to backup.
Page 91: Tool-System Data Backup-Backup To Nas
6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS • The data on the USB memory device has become corrupted. • The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process. To minimize the potential of a failed backup, connect the USB memory device to a PC to confirm the USB memory device is operational and that the backup data is intact before starting this restore process.
Page 92: Tool-Ndss Link Data Clear
6.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear 6.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the QSIG network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
Page 93: Tool-Call Pickup For My Group
6.3 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group 6.3 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0". To activate this tool When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
Page 94: Tool-Extension List View
6.4 Tool—Extension List View 6.4 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Site, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature.
Page 95: Tool-Import
6.5 Tool—Import 6.5 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 6.6 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Page 96 6.5 Tool—Import ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type Import Destination Location...
Page 97 Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial *: Refer to Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000 below. SIP Extension Data Type Import Destination Location Extension Number Extension Number...
Page 98 6.5 Tool—Import Data Type Import Destination Payload Type Payload Type T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Redundancy T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages for T.30 messages T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 99 Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000 Quick Dial The KX-NS1000 only supports an 8-digit Quick Dial format. Therefore, KX-TDE/KX-NCP Quick Dial data in the 4-digit format cannot be imported to the KX-NS1000. SIP Extension – Password KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs allow 3-digit passwords, but KX-NS1000 PBXs require password with 4 digits or more.
Page 100: Tool-Export
6.6 Tool—Export 6.6 Tool—Export Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see 6.5 Tool—Import) to update another PBX. Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
Page 101: Tool-Screen Customize
6.7 Tool—Screen Customize 6.7 Tool—Screen Customize Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator) account level. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User (Administrator) account level.
Page 102: Tool-Um Data Backup
6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a USB memory device connected to the PBX or a NAS.
Page 103: Tool-Um Data Backup-Manual Backup
6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup 6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes of the items you want to back up.
Page 104: Tool-Um Data Backup-Scheduled Backup
6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup 6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the selected data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (Scheduled backups cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup.
Page 105: Tool-Um Data Restore
6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore 6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore data from a USB memory device connected to the PBX or from a file on your local PC.
Page 106 Voice data recorded by users in a KX-TVA series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in the KX-NS1000’s Unified Messaging system. For details, refer to 5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console—KX-TVA System Prompt and Mailbox Data Import in the Installation Manual.
Page 107: Tool-Um Backup History
6.10 Tool—UM Backup History 6.10 Tool—UM Backup History The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen: • Description • Parameters • Completion Status • Date & Time • Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS) This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 108: Tool-Dxdp All Ous
6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS 6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the currently selected site. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the currently selected site Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view. Click OK.
Page 109: Tool-Contact Information
6.12 Tool—Contact information 6.12 Tool—Contact information Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item, this information will be displayed for the user’s reference. Input the following information, and then click OK. •...
Page 110: Tool-Ut Option Setting
6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting 6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level. Note The following apply when programming in On-line mode only: • To apply changes made to these settings for KX-UT series SIP phones connected to Slave unit PBXs in a One-look network, be sure to click the icon after programming.
Page 111: Tool-Url Information
6.14 Tool—URL Information 6.14 Tool—URL Information The URL addresses for downloading the IMAP tool and the Fax Driver can be specified on this screen. These URL addresses will be used for the Unified Messaging Plug in and Fax Driver Tool download buttons displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu.
Page 112 6.14 Tool—URL Information PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 113: Utility
Section 7 Utility This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 114: Utility-Diagnosis
PBX. Test Type Available Cards Local loop back diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs: SLC2, LCOT2, PRI Legacy Gateways: DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, MCSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, CSIF, LCOT8,...
Page 115 MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, or ECSLC24 card. Note • Cards installed in KX-NS1000 PBXs and legacy gateway KX-NCP PBXs cannot be tested using this utility. • The cards to be used for testing must be installed in the same legacy gateway PBX.
Page 116 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis The tests that are performed are as follows: Line current OFF (Ext->CO) Line current from extension to CO line turns off. Line current ON (Ext->CO) Line current from extension to CO line turns on. Off hook detection (CO->Ext) Off-hook generation/detection from CO line to extension DTMF detection (CO->Ext)
Page 117: Utility-Diagnosis-Ping
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To perform a Ping test Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
Page 118: Utility-File
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2 Utility—File 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files on the Storage Memory Card are overwritten. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.
Page 119: Utility-File-File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC Copies system data files from the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. The files that can be downloaded from the Storage Memory Card are as follows: File Name File Type...
Page 120: Utility-File-File View
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View Displays a list of files on the Storage Memory Card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed. This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the Storage Memory Card. The effective date, PCMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.
Page 121: Utility-File-File Delete
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete 7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete Allows you to delete files from the Storage Memory Card. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. The DCSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility. Note Program files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update is currently being performed.
Page 122: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the Storage Memory Card. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary.
Page 123: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the Storage Memory Card to the PC. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. To transfer OGMs to the PC From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
Page 124: Utility-Log
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log 7.3 Utility—Log 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 125 Corresponds to site numbers of PBXs in the One-look network (1 to 16) Slot Type For physical slots (including physical slots of legacy gateway PBXs) – " " (blank) For KX-NS1000 virtual slots – "*" (asterisk) Shelf Number – KX-NS1000 unit: 1 –...
Page 126 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Sub Code Description Slot Number When X is not 4 or 5 Physical shelf Mother board slot: 00 Regular slots: 01–05 Legacy gateway STACK-S card: 00 Optional physical service card slots: – KX-TDE600/KX-TDA600: 01–10 – KX-TDE620/KX-TDA620: 01–11 –...
Page 127: Utility-Log-Syslog
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information: • Type: Describes the type of system event. • Date: The date and time the system event occurred. • Message: Details about the system event. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 128: Utility-Log-Web-Mc Event Log
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log 7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The items displayed on screen are as follows: Item Description Date The date of the event.
Page 129: Utility-Log-Um System Log
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click OK to export a UM System Log file. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
Page 130: Utility-Monitor/Trace
From the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the pattern "X-Y-Z" as follows: • X: Site number (1–16) • Y: Shelf number (1–3) – 1: KX-NS1000 physical shelf – 2: Legacy Gateway 1 – 3: Legacy Gateway 2 • Z: Slot number (1–11) From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
Page 131: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Ipgw16 Protocol Trace
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card be set to INS status. To save trace data to the Storage Memory Card From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace.
Page 132: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Sipgw16 Protocol Trace
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW16 card and saved to a PC using the V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace. This option requires that the target V-SIPGW16 card be set to INS status. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Page 133: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Cs Status Monitor-Air Sync Group
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronized with air synchronization. CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronized with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status.
Page 134: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Cs Status Monitor-Lan Sync Group
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronized with LAN synchronization (KX-NS0154 only). CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronized with. Information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status.
Page 135 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data. A dialog box will be displayed. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file. Enter a file name. Click Save. The dialog box will close.
Page 136: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Fax - Protocol Trace
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace This screen displays trace information for faxes sent and received by the PBX’s FAX Card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following information is recorded for each fax sent or received: •...
Page 137: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Fax - Task Sequence Trace
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace 7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace This screen displays a log of events related to fax activity. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To save a copy of the log, click Save Trace and follow the prompts. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 138: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Um System Trace (Internal)
7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) 7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports: •...
Page 139: Utility-Monitor/Trace-T1 Signaling Bit Monitor
7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1 Signaling Bit Monitor 7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1 Signaling Bit Monitor Displays reference signaling bit information for all channels of a T1 card that is installed in a legacy gateway by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about legacy gateways, see 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Page 140: Utility-Monitor/Trace-T1 Line Trace
7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1 Line Trace 7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1 Line Trace Traces the sent and received signaling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 line of a card installed in a legacy gateway. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about legacy gateways, see 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Page 141: Utility-Report
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report 7.5 Utility—Report 7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital CO lines. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.
Page 142: Utility-Report-Ip Extension Statistical Information
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information 7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), V-IPEXT32 cards, V-IPCS4 cards, and the DSP card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Collection Started Time...
Page 143: Utility-Report-Um View Reports
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To view a report In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
Page 144 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Call Account Report The call account report displays information about outgoing call activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox. The report includes date, starting time, used port, connection time, called telephone number, call type, exit status of each callout, total callouts number and the connection time for local or long distance call, and total number of outgoing calls.
Page 145 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Security Information Report The security information report displays information about mailbox accesses. The report includes the date of the last change and last access, number of total accesses, login, and failed accesses. Hourly Statistics Report The hourly statistics report displays information about the number of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per hour, etc.
Page 146: Utility-Report-E-Mail Report
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail Report. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent: •...
Page 147: Utility-Report-Ip-Cs Information
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on the usage of wireless channels and air synchronization of IP-CSs. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Date...
Page 148: Utility-Report-Ip-Cs Information-Lan Sync Information
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information Displays accumulated statistical information on the performance of CSs being synchronized using LAN synchronization. On this screen, you can view the performance of wireless devices on the LAN, which is useful for troubleshooting and determining whether the number of channels needs to be increased. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 149 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information Item Description Short Term Diag The short term (within the previous 1 hour) diagnosis for LAN synchronization. • Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined. • Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be determined because the IGMP querier could not be found. •...
Page 150 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information Note You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log. PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 151: Utility-Report-Ip-Cs Information-Ps Call Disconnect Log
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log Displays a list of PS calls that have been disconnected at the CS selected on the parent screen. This log can be saved as a text file. This screen can be accessed by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link on either the IP-CS Statistical Information screen or the LAN Sync Information screen.
Page 152: Utility-Activation Key Installation
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are copied from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 153: Utility-Email Notification
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert 7.7 Utility—Email Notification 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status. System Alarm An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message will contain details about the alarm.
Page 154 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert • Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (16 ports) • Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (24 ports) • Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (1 port) • Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (2 ports) • Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L. (4 ports) Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive expiry notice messages. Notice Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly.
Page 155: Utility-Email Notification-System Analysis
7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
Page 156: Utility-Email Notification-Test Email
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
Page 157: Utility-Command
7.8.2 Utility—Command—Router Command 7.8 Utility—Command 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialog. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialog: Enter the desired command, then click RUN.
Page 158: Utility-Um - System Prompts Customization
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customization 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customization The System Prompts customization screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 159 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customization Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback Select the desired system prompts. Click Play/Record. Click Play or Stop. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 160: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. Click Add/Delete.
Page 161: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
Page 162: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting List
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
Page 163: External Call
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Note Calls between extensions that are connected in a QSIG network are seen as external calls, irrespective of whether an activation key for QSIG enhanced features is used. To enable Automatic Two-way Recording for this type of call, set External Call to On.
Page 164 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Maintenance Console Location 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Feature Manual References 20.1.9 Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager Supervisor Indicates the extension designated as a supervisor that may play, delete, or confirm the information of two-way recordings (reference only).
Page 165: Document Version 2016-03 Pc Programming Manual
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Mailbox Number Indicates the Unified Messaging mailbox where two-way recordings will be stored (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range Mailbox number Maintenance Console Location 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List PC Programming Manual References 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.9 Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager...
Page 166: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Maintenance
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop. Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs: •...
Page 167: Utility-Um - System Maintenance
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance 7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance Program settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance. System Maintenance Mode Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode. System Maintenance Start Time Specifies the System Maintenance start time. After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.
Page 168: Utility-Cs-Web Connection
7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection This parameter is unavailable. PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 169: Utility-Flash Rom Id Information
7.13 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information 7.13 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information Accessing this screen will display the Flash ROM ID number pre-assigned to the PBX, used for PBX installation management. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 170 7.13 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 171: Users
Section 8 Users This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 172: Users-User Profiles
8.1 Users—User Profiles 8.1 Users—User Profiles Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added, edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account. Note • For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must use the Screen Customize tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User Profiles screen.
Page 173 8.1 Users—User Profiles Item Description FWD setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD destination for calls from CO lines. Destination FWD/DND setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from extensions. Mode FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions.
Page 174 8.1 Users—User Profiles If these items are grayed out, click Direct Login to log in directly to the PBX associated with the UM Group of your mailbox to make changes to these items. • buttons are not visible for User (User) level accounts. PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 175: Users-User Profiles-Advanced Setting
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be programmed by users.
Page 176 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer setting for the subscriber’s extension. The subscriber’s extension will not ring. Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name. The Unified Messaging system then calls the subscriber and plays back the caller name.
Page 177 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Maintenance Console Location 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Feature Manual References 20.1.14 Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status—Transfer to (Selection/Other) Specifies the transfer destination for calls transferred according to the VIP Filter setting. Default Not stored Value Range Extension: The call is transferred to the user’s extension.
Page 178 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number - 1 If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, specifying a telephone number here will transfer the caller to that telephone number. Note If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the call screening prompt before the call is transferred.
Page 179 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Specifies how the scenario handles a call when there is no answer. Note More than one option can be selected. Default Leave a Message/Transfer to Operator/Return to Top Menu Value Range Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
Page 180 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Scenario Setting You can select scenarios set in 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting for your extension. A scenario can be set temporarily, or scenarios can be selected for use according to the Absent Message setting of the extension of the subscriber.
Page 181: Users-Add User
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User 8.2 Users—Add User 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings on a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be displayed with information already entered when editing an existing user.
Page 182 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User • The First Name and Last Name are copied to the corresponding First Name and Last Name on the following screen for the specified mailbox number. C. 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters • Changing the name settings in the Extension Settings or Mailbox Settings screens listed above will not change the First Name or Last Name on this screen (the copying function is one-way).
Page 183 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Class of Service Select a COS for the user from the drop-down list. (COS) Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen. The following prompts can be recorded in this screen: •...
Page 184 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Advanced setting* Click to view the selected mailbox’s settings. See 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings. Note When User (User) level accounts access these settings, additional items are displayed. See 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting. Unified Messaging Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download Plug in site for the IMAP Session Controller software.
Page 185: Users-Add User-Multiple Users
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users 8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to create Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension numbers.
Page 186: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording 8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for extensions they are supervising.
Page 187: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Record List
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List 8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list. Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two-way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM group.
Page 188: Users-Icdg Management
8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor 8.4 Users—ICDG Management This screen is accessible only by users designated as an ACD supervisor. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Description Users designated as an ACD supervisor can specify an ICD group to monitor, set monitoring conditions, and begin monitoring.
Page 189 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Default 1 Group Value Range 1 Group, 4 Groups Maintenance Console Location 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Manual References 10.1.8 ICD Group Features—Supervisory Feature (ACD) Basic Settings—Select ICD Group Selects the ICD groups to be managed by the ACD supervisor, from a drop-down list. Default Blank Value Range...
Page 190 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Number of Current Waiting Calls (1-30) Specifies the threshold number of current waiting calls. When this number is matched or exceeded, calls are highlighted on the monitor screen. Default Value Range 1–30 Maintenance Console Location 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Manual References 10.1.8 ICD Group Features—Supervisory Feature (ACD)
Page 191 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Manual References 10.1.8 ICD Group Features—Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Blinking Specifies whether highlighted items blink on the monitor screen. Default Enable Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Feature Manual References 10.1.8 ICD Group Features—Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Full Screen Display (pixels) Select the display resolution of the monitor screen for full screen display.
Page 192: Users-Icdg Management-Acd Report
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Description On this screen, users designated as an ACD supervisor can create ACD reports on ICD groups after filtering according to group, agent, or call. Filtering types are separated by tabs. Supervisor selection Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop-down list.
Page 193 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Value Range Comma(,), Semicolon(;) Click OK. Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Manual References 10.1.8 ICD Group Features—Supervisory Feature (ACD) Group Group—View Report To display a report according to groups, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Center Feature Enhancement activation key or the Built-in ACD report activation key.
Page 194 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Item Description Wait Time (Lost) Total The total waiting time of canceled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS(D)) Average The average waiting time of canceled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS) Max. The longest waiting time of canceled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS) Max.
Page 195 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Click the Select button. Click an ICD group from those displayed in the Available Group for ACD Report window to select it. Up to 64 groups can be selected. Click ==> to move the selected ICD groups to the Selected Group for ACD Report window. To remove ICD groups from the Selected Group for ACD Report window, click a group to select it and click <==.
Page 196 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Item Description Total The total talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS(D)) Average The average talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS) Max. The longest talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS) Login Time The total login time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS(D)) Not-ready Time The total not ready time for the target agent.
Page 197 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Click an agent from those displayed in the Available Agent for ACD Report window to select it. Up to 8192 agents are displayed, and up to 128 agents can be selected from the list. Click ==> to move the selected agents to the Selected Agent for ACD Report window. To remove agents from the Selected Agent for ACD Report window, click an agent to select it and click <==.
Page 198 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Item Description Result The processing result. (Answered/Abandoned/Overflowed/ Unanswered ICDG The incoming ICD Group number. Incoming Agent The extension number of the agent that received the call. Answering Agent The answering member. (Extension Name/Extension Number) Talk Time The talking time.
Page 199 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Click ==> to move the ICD group you selected in step 2 to the Selected Group for ACD Report window. (Maximum 64 groups) To delete an ICD group from the Selected Group for ACD Report window, click the ICD group name, and then click <==.
Page 200 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Maintenance Console Location 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Manual References 10.1.8 ICD Group Features—Supervisory Feature (ACD) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 201: Users-Icdg Management-Acd Scheduled Export
8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export 8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export On this screen, users can register or delete the schedule for the automatic export of ACD Report data. The PBX system will automatically export the selected ACD Report data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX.
Page 202: Users-Icdg Management-Acd Export History
8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History 8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History The export history for ACD Report data can be checked on this screen. The following items are recorded for each export: • Date/Time • Description • Parameters • Report Profile •...
Page 203: Pbx Configuration-[1] Configuration
Section 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 204: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary).
Page 205 Install the STACK-M card and connect the legacy gateway PBX to the STACK-M card using the supplied stacking cable. For details, refer to 4.6 Stacking Cards in the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual. In the Configuration—Slot physical shelf screen, click on the STACK-M card in the list on the right.
Page 206 Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 on the slot screen to program the PBXs connected to the STACK-M card. • For information about hardware configuration restrictions and conditions for legacy gateways, refer to Conditions for Connecting Legacy Gateways in 4.6 Stacking Cards in the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual. Supported Card Types Card...
Page 207 Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located in the PBX. • Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the KX-NS1000 PBX. • Shelf "2" corresponds to the physical shelf of the PBX connected to Legacy Gateway •...
Page 208: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Summary
9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX. Click one of the following buttons to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX: • Physical: View the physical card shelf. •...
Page 209 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Value Range INS: The card is in service. OUS: The card is out of service. Fault: The card is not communicating with the network. Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot. IDLE: No card is installed in the slot. Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Programming Manual References...
Page 210 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Card Type Indicates the type of virtual card installed (reference only). Default Current Card Type Value Range V-SIPGW16, V-IPGW16, V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, V-IPCS4, V-UTEXT32 Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Status...
Page 211 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Value Range Card type. Available cards vary by the model of the legacy gateway. Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Installation Manual References Equipment Compatibility for Legacy Gateways Status Indicates the card status (reference only).
Page 212 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 213: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Activation Key Status
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files on the Storage Memory Card and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the Activation Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
Page 214 IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension (ch): Activate IP-PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP SIP Extension (ch): Activate SIP-Phone for 3rd party /IP Conference Phone IP-CS channel expansion (CS unit): IP-CS channel expansion to 8ch One-look Network: Multi site connection with KX-NS1000 PBXs QSIG Network: QSIG Networking Built-in Router: Built-in Router function...
Page 215 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status CA Operator Console (user): CA Operator Console CA Thin Client Server: Thin Client Server Connection Call Center Feature Enhancement: Built-in ACD Report, Announcement of waiting number for queuing Queue Position Announcement: Announcement of waiting number for queuing Built-in ACD Report: Built-in ACD Report Poltys CCAccounting: CCAccounting Poltys CCAccounting A.L.: CCAccounting (annual license)
Page 216 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Activation Key Indicates the number of channels (or CA users) provided by activation key files on the Storage Memory Card (reference only). Default Not applicable Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Features in total Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the mother board and activation key files on the Storage Memory Card (reference only).
Page 217: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property
9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property The properties of the PBX system can be specified. Main DSP CODEC G.711 only (SIP extension) Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for SIP extension calls. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 218: System Status
9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property System Speed Dial Download For UT Extensions Specifies the maximum number of system speed dial entries that will be downloaded to KX-UT series SIP phones. Default Value Range 0–300 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Programming Manual References 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property—Option—...
Page 219 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Multisite Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 220 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range 500–8000 ms, in units of 500 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Multisite message resend expired time Specifies the number of seconds after which a message being re-sent between the Master unit and Slave units will timeout if it cannot be sent.
Page 221 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Multisite Keepalive Time-out time Specifies the Keep Alive Time-Out time in seconds for communication between the Master unit and Slave units. Default 300 s Value Range 30, 40, 50, 60, 120, 180, 300, 600, 1800, 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Multisite Keepalive time for Isolated Mode...
Page 222 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Master Suspend if Backup Master Detected Specifies whether or not the Master unit enters suspended mode when it recovers from a fault, if it detects that a Master Backup unit exists. If the Master unit is suspended, all extension and CO lines controlled by the Master unit are unusable.
Page 223 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range Terminal, Gateway Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Gatekeeper ID to Gatekeeper Specifies the authentication ID notified to the gatekeeper. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 Characters Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Bandwidth to Gatekeeper Specifies the used bandwidth information notified to the gatekeeper.
Page 224 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Primary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper. Default 1719 Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper. Default 192.168.1.4 Value Range...
Page 225 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property RAS Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite. Default 1719 Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property QSIG Connectionless Tunneling TCP Port Number Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunneling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
Page 226 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Default 10000 Value Range 1–65000 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW Settings–Main GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW IP Address...
Page 227 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Connection for IP-GW16 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature between the V-IPGW and KX-TDE/KX-TDA IP-GW cards. Default Enable (TDA) Value Range Disable (TDE), Enable (TDA) Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Protocol...
Page 228 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW Settings–Option 1 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used.
Page 229 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Page 230 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal. Default G.711 Inband Value Range G.711 Inband, T.38 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.
Page 231 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Programming Manual References 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—GW Settings–Option 1— IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones. Default Outband (H.245) Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245) Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833.
Page 232 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Default Value Range 272–512 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property...
Page 233 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Default Transferred TCF Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property DN2IP Leading Number Specifies the leading digits in dialed numbers by which to associate calls with the appropriate destination.
Page 234 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range GW Group, GW No. Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW Group Specifies the number of the destination gateway group. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group Selection on this screen is set to GW Group. Default Value Range 1–256...
Page 235: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Site Property
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property The properties of the PBX site can be specified. When you place the mouse cursor over the Site Property button, Main, FAX Card, and NSVM buttons are displayed. Click a button to open that site property screen. 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Overall settings for the PBX site can be specified.
Page 236 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main • When this item is set to "Disable", system functions for the site will become unavailable if the Master unit and/or Backup Master unit fails. Default Disable Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property PC Programming Manual References 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability Feature Manual References...
Page 237 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property PC Programming Manual References 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial— Use Quick Dial for CO rerouting during "Break" Mode. Feature Manual References 3.1.1 Backup Master Mode and Isolated Mode P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the site.
Page 238 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main LLDP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether the PBX notifies IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) to enable or disable the ability to send and receive LLDP packets. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property IP Terminal Registration Mode Specifies the IP terminal registration mode for registering IP telephones to the PBX.
Page 239 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Note If this setting is changed, the V-IPGW cards and/or V-SIPGW cards installed at the site will be deleted. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property VoIP-DSP Options The settings in this tab relate to IP extensions and IP CO lines.
Page 240 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Send Music On Hold to IP trunk (for P2P conversation) Enables the sending of hold music to an IP CO line during a P2P connection call between an IP extension and IP CO line. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable...
Page 241 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Default 20 ms Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Max.
Page 242 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 1000–65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for FAX Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications. Default 50 ms Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Max.
Page 243 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for FAX Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for fax communications. Default 1800 ms Value Range 1000–65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DTMF Detection Level for G.711A Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711A codec.
Page 244 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected. Default 3000 ms Value Range 20–5000 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property...
Page 245 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 50 ´ n (n=1–100) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) - SIP Extension Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal for SIP extensions. Default 500 ms Value Range...
Page 246 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern - SIP Extension Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation for SIP extensions. Default Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CED Signal Fixation Detection Time - SIP Extension Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected by the PBX for SIP extensions.
Page 247 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range -7–8 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property T38 FAX Transmit Level A-Law - SIP Extension Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the codec used is G.711A for SIP extensions.
Page 248 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Default 0 db Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Page 249 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711 Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using the G.711 codec. Default Enable Value Range...
Page 250 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Default 200 ms Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Init.
Page 251 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Page 252 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT / SIP-MLT) Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Real-time Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 253 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Default 7547 Value Range 0–65535 (Setting "0" will close port access for this feature) Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX-side ACS for control communication with KX-UT series SIP phones.
Page 254 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX-side ACS for data communication with KX-UT series SIP phones. Default 37580 Value Range 0–65535 (Setting "0" will close port access for this feature) Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References...
Page 255 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 4.1.24 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Built-in Communication Assistant Server Specifies the port number for the Communication Assistant (CA) application. Default 33334 Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 256 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main LINK for Maintenance Port Indicates the current connection status of the MNT port (reference only). Default Not applicable Value Range 1: Disconnect, 0: Connect Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Media Relay Common—NAT - External IP Address Specifies the NAT device external IP address (common).
Page 257 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS Specifies the outside-facing MGCP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Default 32727 Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type...
Page 258 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s) Specifies the time interval between transmissions of Keep Alive packets. Default Value Range 10–60 s Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.
Page 259 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Default 7547 Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
Page 260 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. for Network Survivability Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. This setting specifies the port number used for the secondary server for network survivability. Default 37547 Value Range...
Page 261 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - NTP Server Port No. Specifies the outside-facing port of the network gateway connected to the NTP server. Default Value Range 1–65535...
Page 262 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—SIP Register Expire Time (s) Specifies the length of time that will elapse before the current registration expires. Default Value Range 10–3600 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 263 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection Option—NAT - RTP IP Address Specifies the RTP server’s IP address. If using a separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP Address, configure this setting.
Page 264 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address for Network Survivability Specifies the outside-facing IP address of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. This setting specifies the port number used for the secondary server for network survivability.
Page 265: Sip Extension
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main SIP Extension SIP Location Hold Time Max. Specifies the maximum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions. Default 320 s Value Range 10–3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension SIP Location Hold Time Min.
Page 266 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension SIP Session Timer Min. Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting SIP sessions when no communication is detected. Default 90 s Value Range 90–3600 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 267 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Default 37547 Value Range...
Page 268 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Default 37580 Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server.
Page 269 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the NTP server. Default Not stored Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 100 characters (host name) Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References...
Page 270 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s) Specifies the time interval between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet. Note • This interval must be shorter than the NAT binding time of the router. The default value is appropriate in most cases.
Page 271 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections that is used when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is not available. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 272 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Ability Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected remote extensions. Default Enable Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property...
Page 273 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Default 64 ms Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Default -3 db Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location...
Page 274 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Default Weak Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Conference DSP Conference Priority Specifies the Conference Priority (the conference resource you want to use). Default Preferential Value Range...
Page 275 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-UTEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-UTEXT card.
Page 276 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main DSP Digital Gain (Up) on TDM side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication. Default -3 db Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Down) on TDM side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode...
Page 277 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 278: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Site Property-Fax Card
9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card 9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card Information and settings for the FAX Card for the PBX site can be confirmed and specified. Status Indicates if a FAX Card is installed in the PBX (reference only). Default Not applicable Value Range...
Page 279: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Site Property-Nsvm
9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified. Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Default 64 ms Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 280 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Default 3 db Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Default Weak Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property FAX Detection Ability...
Page 281 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected. Default 3000 ms Value Range 20–5000 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property...
Page 282 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Value Range 1000–60000 (ms) Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Maximum Continuous Tone Time Specifies the length of time of a continuous tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call. Default 15000 ms Value Range...
Page 283: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Card Property
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified. Main Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Default 64 ms Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 284 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Default 3 db Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Default Weak Value Range...
Page 285 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected. Default 3000 ms Value Range 20–5000 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 286: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Port Property
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified. Main The Port for each item is displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 287 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property UM Group Number Selects the number of the UM group. Default 1:Voicemail 1 Value Range 1–16 Maintenance Console Location 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 288: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-Port Type View
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be accessed from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including extension cards of legacy gateways.
Page 289: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Shelf Property
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Page 290 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property NAT - Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. Specifies the starting port number of the dynamic ports used for NAT Traversal. Default 16000 Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to send Keep Alive packets in order to maintain the NAT binding information.
Page 291 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Value Range 1–60 s Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property NAT - Fixed Global IP Address Specifies the global IP address of the router with NAT enabled. This setting is compulsory if Fixed IP Addr. is selected in NAT Traversal.
Page 292 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property STUN External Address Detection Retry Counter Specifies the number of times that a query is retried when no response is received from the STUN server. Default Value Range 0–8 Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property STUN Resending Interval Specifies the length of time until a query is retried when no response is received from the STUN server.
Page 293 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Mode2: Searches SIP accounts, then DID numbers. Searches the SIP CO lines of the tenant of the search-matched DID number, in ascending order (Low ® High). Mode 3: Searches SIP accounts, then DID numbers. Searches the SIP CO lines of the tenant of the search-matched DID number, in descending order (High ®...
Page 294 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP QoS Ability Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header. Default Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when "ToS"...
Page 295 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Default Value Range 5–255 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP T2 Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE responses and non-INVITE requests. Default Value Range 40–255 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Document Version 2016-03...
Page 296: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Card Property
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. DNS SRV Record Resolve Ability Specifies whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS SRV record.
Page 297: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Port Property
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Programming Port Properties Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each virtual SIP gateway port. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.
Page 298 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be set are OUS. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
Page 299 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Connection Attribute Specifies whether to connect a port to a Trunk Adaptor or use it as a SIP gateway. Default SIP Provider Value Range SIP Provider, Trunk Adaptor Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Feature Manual References 19.1.6 Trunk Adaptor Connection Trunk Property...
Page 300 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property • When you save the data on the Main screen, for each virtual SIP gateway port that has Channel Attribute set to Basic channel, the following items are checked for duplication: SIP Server Name, SIP Server IP Address, and SIP Service Domain. A maximum of 32 different SIP providers can be programmed.
Page 301 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Default Not stored Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property SIP Server IP Address for Failover Specifies the IP address of the SIP proxy server for failover. Note Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server for failover, if provided by the SIP provider. This setting cannot be changed while the V-SIPGW16 card is set to INS.
Page 302 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, , and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Backup Specifies if the port will be used in Master Backup mode to perform the functions of a port on the Master unit...
Page 303 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 1–256 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group Feature Manual References 15.1.5 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 304 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property User Name Specifies the user name (SIP Account) provided by the SIP provider. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 305 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Default Not stored Value Range Max. 32 characters The available characters are those allowed in RFC3986. "0"–"9" "a"–"z" "A"–"Z" "-", ".", "_", ":", "/", "?", "#", "[", "]", "@", "!", "$", "&", "'", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "=" Other characters are not allowed.
Page 306 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Register Sending Interval Specifies the maximum length of interval time after which the PBX sends the REGISTER message. Default 3600 Value Range 10–86400 s Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Un-Register Ability when port INS Specifies whether to unregister the previous registration and send the REGISTER message to the SIP server when the port status is set back to INS.
Page 307 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Registrar Server IP Address for Failover Specifies the IP address of the SIP registrar server for failover. Note Specify the IP address of the outbound registrar server for failover, if provided by the SIP provider. This setting cannot be changed while the V-SIPGW16 card is set to INS.
Page 308 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 309 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property STUN Server Port Number Specifies the port number of the STUN server. Default 3478 Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 310 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Disable: This feature is not activated. Enable (Active): Activates this feature only if the other device supports the feature. Enable (Passive): Activates this feature only when requested by the other device. Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Session Expire Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to the repeated...
Page 311 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property SIP 200 Response Timer (*100 ms) Specifies the amount of time to wait for a SIP 200 (OK) response when establishing a connection between two parties. (Specifying "0" will disable the timer.) Default Value Range 0–18000 ´...
Page 312 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Failover Timer(REGISTER) Specifies the amount of time to wait for a response for a REGISTER request. Note • If 0 is specified, failover operation follows the T1/T2 timer. •...
Page 313 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range From Header, P-Preferred-Identity Header Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property From Header—User Part Specifies the value to be stored in the username part of the SIP-URI of the From header. Default User Name Value Range User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP...
Page 314 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property P-Preferred-Identity Header—SIP-URI Specifies the complete SIP-URI address of the P-Preferred-Identity header. The configuration in P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part will be invalid if this parameter is set. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Number Format Selects the format of the CLIP number to be sent to the called party.
Page 315 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Max. 20 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Anonymous format in "From" header Specifies the format of the "From" header when not sending caller ID. Default Display name and SIP-URI Value Range...
Page 316 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Called Party The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 317 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property E.164 - Prefix for own system Specifies the Mobile Device Access prefix for incoming calls from E.164-enabled mobile devices. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property E.164 - Prefix for other system Specifies the Mobile Device Access outgoing prefix for calls made to E.164-enabled mobile devices.
Page 318 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Default Current status Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used.
Page 319 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Page 320 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal. Default G.711 Inband Value Range G.711 Inband, T.38 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.
Page 321 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (SIP INFO) Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type of RFC2833 for DTMF tones. Note Manual programming is required if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Default Value Range 96–127...
Page 322 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Default Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field. Default Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field.
Page 323 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number. Default Not stored Value Range 00–FF Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable each port to send RTCP packets. Default Enable Value Range...
Page 324 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T.38 The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 325 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol. Default Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 326 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T.38 FAX NAT Traversal Specifies the NAT Traversal packet type when sending or receiving faxes using the T.38 protocol. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Blank UDP Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property...
Page 327 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol. Default Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 328 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is compulsory when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available. Default Not stored Value Range 00–FF Maintenance Console Location...
Page 329 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Note For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this setting, the setting for DSP Digital Gain (Down) in 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main is applied.
Page 330 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Note For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this setting, the setting for NLP Setting in 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main is applied.
Page 331 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range P-Asserted-Identity Header From Header Note • To copy values from one location to another, click Copy to. • If the Channel Attribute setting of the port is "Additional", the setting cannot be changed. Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property CLIR...
Page 332 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Blind Transfer(REFER) Specifies whether to allow blind transfers using REFER. Default Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Attended Transfer(REFER) Specifies whether to allow attended transfers using REFER.
Page 333: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw16-Shelf Property
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Main Gatekeeper Available Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. This setting can only be changed when all V-IPGW cards are set to OUS.
Page 334 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property RTP QoS Available Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field of the packet. Default Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property RTP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field.
Page 335 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number. Default Value Range 00–FF Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS Available Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 336 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is compulsory when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.
Page 337 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Default 0 dB Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Page 338 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Default Weak Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) QSIG-CT...
Page 339 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Manual References 15.1.19 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding) Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each CO line. Default Private Value Range Public, Private, VPN Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Outgoing Call First-digit Timer (T302-1) Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialed after seizing a virtual IP CO line.
Page 340: Incoming Call
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Default Value Range 0–9, #, * Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Incoming Call Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Page 341 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Voice Codec Priority 3rd Specifies the third highest priority codec type. Default G.729A Value Range None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Packet Sampling Time for G.711A Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
Page 342 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
Page 343 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent out. Default Outband (H.245) Value Range...
Page 344 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 345 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Timer T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call. Default 1800 Value Range 0–18000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call.
Page 346 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Default Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message. Default Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 347 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message. Default 1000 Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
Page 348 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message. Default Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Page 349 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 350: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw16-Shelf Property-Gk Settings
9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings 9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed. Destination Number Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings Device Name...
Page 351: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Hunt Pattern
9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern 9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP CO lines to the PBX. A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.
Page 352 9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern Programming Manual References 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property— Call Distribution Port Group Feature Manual References 4.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 353: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw16-Port Property
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Trunk Adaptor To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
Page 354: Call Distribution Port Group
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property Feature Manual References 19.1.6 Trunk Adaptor Connection Call Distribution Port Group Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming CO line calls are directed through the virtual VoIP gateway port. Default Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property Feature Manual References...
Page 355: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipext32-Card Property
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified. Signaling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 356 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 357 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Resending Time Out (PTAP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 358 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Default 75 s Value Range 75–120 s Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Default 64 ms Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 359 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Default -5 dB Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Page 360: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipext32-Port Property
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 361 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Click Forced De-registration. A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialog box will appear.
Page 362 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.
Page 363 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-PT (reference only). Default Current IP address Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 364 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Default Value Range 1–256 Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Programming Manual References 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group Feature Manual References 15.1.5 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 365 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 366 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT. Default Headset OFF Value Range Headset OFF, Headset ON Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) C.Waiting with Headset When headset mode is enabled, selects whether a call waiting tone is heard through the telephone's speaker phone or the ear piece of the headset.
Page 367 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data. Some codecs may become unavailable depending on the value set here, as follows: –...
Page 368 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Announce Mode Specifies if the extension’s built-in ANNOUNCE feature is enabled.
Page 369 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command.
Page 370 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent out. Default Outband (RFC2833) Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833) Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Payload Type...
Page 371 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Primary/Secondary, set the unused ports that will be used as secondary ports to "Secondary". Note Ports that have already been registered (A value other than the default of "00:00:00:00:00:00" is set for IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) on the Main tab) cannot be set to "Secondary"...
Page 372 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command. See Setting Secondary Ports above for details. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 373 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Default Primary Value Range Primary, Secondary Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 2.1.7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Site Indicates the site where the assigned secondary port is located (reference only). Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above).
Page 374 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 2.1.7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Port Indicates the port number of the assigned secondary port (reference only). Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above). Default Not applicable Value Range...
Page 375 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command. See Setting Secondary Ports above for details. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 376 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.17 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 377: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipext32-Card Property
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Default 64 ms Value Range...
Page 378 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Default 6 dB Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension NLP Setting...
Page 379: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipext32-Port Property
9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Main Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 380 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Default Current status Value Range...
Page 381 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Programming Manual References 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main— P2P Group Feature Manual References 15.1.5 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range P2P Group Name Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Programming Manual References...
Page 382 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Default Starting at 101 Value Range...
Page 383 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service OUS: The port is out of service Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Bearer Selects the bearer mode.
Page 384 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References...
Page 385 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Value Range 4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z) Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 386 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property FAX/T.38 The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Default Starting at 101 Value Range...
Page 387 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service OUS: The port is out of service Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature.
Page 388 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal. Default No Speed Limit Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension...
Page 389 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol. Default Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 390: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipcs4-Card Property
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified. Signaling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 391 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 392 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property Resending Time Out (PTAP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 393 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property CS Repeater Mode Specifies the CS Repeater Mode setting. If Normal is selected, DECT communication will not be encrypted. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Default Normal Value Range Normal, Optional Maintenance Console Location...
Page 394: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipcs4-Port Property
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port. IP-CS Registration and De-registration An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 395 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialog box will appear. Click OK. A dialog box will appear. Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close.
Page 396 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Value Range None, Registered Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Channel expansion Specifies whether to expand the number of channels for the IP-CS. This setting is available only for KX-NS0154 IP-CSs. This setting will be grayed out if the IP-CS’s port is not set to OUS, or a non-supported type of IP-CS (e.g., KX-NCP0158) is connected to the port.
Page 397 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Program Ver. Indicates the program software file version of the IP-CS (reference only). Default Not applicable Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronization Group number to the IP-CS.
Page 398 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Synchronization 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Sync Group Setting Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 399 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Default 20 ms Value Range...
Page 400 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Announce Mode Specifies if the IP-CS’s (KX-NS0154 only) built-in ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. An IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) in a remote location with ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the PBX’s IP Address information to other terminals in the remote location in place of manually programming the PBX’s IP address at each terminal. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 401 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. CS Name Specifies the IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) name of the port. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 402 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Feature Manual References 2.1.7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Site Indicates the site where the assigned secondary port is located (reference only). Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above). Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 403 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Default Not stored Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Feature Manual References 2.1.7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Remote Place The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 404 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Feature Manual References 10.1.16 IP-CS (KX-NS0154) Phone Location Specifies the location of an IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) connected to the port. Default Local Value Range Local: The IP-CS is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration). Remote (MRG): The IP-CS is accessing the PBX remotely (use Media Relay Gateway).
Page 405: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Utext32-Card Property
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property Various settings can be programmed for V-UTEXT32 cards. Click Common Settings to change these settings. Main Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Default 64 ms Value Range OFF, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104, 112, 120, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property...
Page 406 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Default 6 dB Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Default Weak Value Range...
Page 407 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property INFORM retransmission counter Specifies the number of times the PERIODIC Inform is sent for extensions when attempting to establish a connection. Default 3 times Value Range 2–10 times Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property NTP Query Interval...
Page 408: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Utext32-Port Property
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for the ports of V-UTEXT32 cards. KX-UT Series SIP Phone Registration and De-registration A KX-UT series SIP phone must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and SIP phone before it can be used.
Page 409 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Click Forced De-registration. A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialog box will appear.
Page 410 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.
Page 411 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range None, Registered Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) Specifies the MAC address of the SIP phone. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS.
Page 412 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Default Not applicable Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 18.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group. Default Value Range 1–256 Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Programming Manual References 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group...
Page 413 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Programming Manual References 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Manual References 15.1.5 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Option The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 414 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property System Speed Dial Download Specifies if the connected SIP phone will download system speed dial entries from the PBX. Default Enable Value Range...
Page 415 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property UT Codec Priority - 1st—UT Codec Priority - 4th Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. None is only available for 2nd, 3rd, and 4th priorities. Default 1st: G.722 2nd: G.711A 3rd: G.711Mu 4th: G.729A Value Range G.722, G711A, G.729A, G711Mu, None...
Page 416 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range 1–2 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Jitter Buffer - Initial Delay Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Default Value Range 1–7 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Gain Type Specifies the type of gain file to distribute to connected SIP devices.
Page 417 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Access the port property screen of the site where primary ports will be assigned secondary ports. Click Set Secondary. A dialog box will appear. From the drop-down list, select a site where secondary ports will be assigned. Note The number displayed for Available ports indicates the maximum number of available ports at the selected site that can be registered as secondary ports.
Page 418 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 419 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above). Default Not applicable Value Range Site number and name Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 2.1.7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Slot...
Page 420 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Manual References 2.1.7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Remote Place The settings on this screen are for programming the Simple Remote Connection feature for connecting SIP phones in remote locations to the PBX.
Page 421 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Phone Location Specifies the type of extension connected to the port. Default Local Value Range...
Page 422 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT Specifies the protocol to use for remote SIP phone data communication. HTTPS is strongly recommended for remote SIP-MLT connections. Default HTTP Value Range HTTPS, HTTP Note A total of 20 HTTPS connections can be set per PBX site. If "HTTPS" is selected but the total number of HTTPS connections available at the site will be exceeded by changing this setting, a warning message will be displayed and the setting change will be canceled.
Page 423: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot- Slc2 - Card Property
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property The property for the extension cards can be specified. SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Default Normal Value Range...
Page 424 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial. Default 96 ms Value Range 8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Page 425 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property Hook Threshold PD A-law Specifies the current threshold (A-law) for switching from Power Save mode to an active state. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. Default Not stored Value Range 1.5–4.0 mA...
Page 426 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property Hook Threshold PD Mu-law Specifies the current threshold (µ-law) for switching from Power Save mode to an active state. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. Default Not stored Value Range 1.5–4.0 mA...
Page 427: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Slc2 - Port Property
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 428 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Default Current status Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the PBX. Maintenance Console Location 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Programming Manual References None Extension Number...
Page 429: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Lco Type
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analog CO line cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Default Value Range 3–6 s...
Page 430 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognized by the PBX as the bell signal sent from the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call. Default 144 ms Value Range...
Page 431 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range 630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Page 432 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Default 40 ms Value Range 4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break Specifies the % break for a high speed pulse dial.
Page 433 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type High Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here. Default 20 ms Value Range...
Page 434 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID Signaling Selects the type of Caller ID signaling provided by the telephone company. Default Value Range FSK, FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Manual References...
Page 435 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information. Default Length + Timer Value Range...
Page 436 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range None, 80 ´ n (n=1–15) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Page 437: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Lco Port
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Various settings can be programmed for each analog CO line port. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 438 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Value Range None, 6.5 ms, 8 ´ n (n=1–112) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Manual References 4.1.23 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analog CO line.
Page 439 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Caller ID Detection Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analog CO line. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port...
Page 440 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Value Range None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Manual References 6.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Default 1.5 s Value Range...
Page 441: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Pri Type
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type The properties of the PRI card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Default Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 442 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Default Value Range 0–18000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302...
Page 443 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN.
Page 444 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Default 1100 Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message. Default Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 445 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message. Default Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Page 446 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Default Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 447 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–18000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Default Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 448 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN. Default Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN.
Page 449 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Default Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 450 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Default Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T320 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol. Default Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 451 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. Default Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 452: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Pri Port
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 453 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network. Default No Transmission Value Range No Transmission: Status Message is not sent. When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
Page 454 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence for the port. This setting is only available when using the PRI23 card. Default Extended Multi frame (ESF) Value Range Extended Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12) Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port CO Setting...
Page 455 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Page 456 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after the extension user completes dialing. The PBX recognizes the end of dialing when (1) # is dialed, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialed, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Page 457 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References Network Loopback Test Extension Setting Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 458: Network Configuration
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No.
Page 459 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Default Current status Value Range...
Page 460 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Default Value Range CO: For connecting to public network Extension: For connecting to extension QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port) QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 461 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing CO line calls routed through public and private networks. Default Public: Unknown Private: Private Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private...
Page 462 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Supplementary Service The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 463 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911 Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used. The available services depend on the setting of Port Type on this screen. Default COLP: No CLIR: Yes...
Page 464: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Legacy-Gw1/Legacy-Gw2
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2 Settings for PBXs connected to the KX-NS1000 over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway. Note •...
Page 465 For your reference, the following information is included on each Card Property screen for cards installed in legacy gateways: Site: The site number of the KX-NS1000 PBX to which the legacy gateway is connected. Shelf: The shelf number of the STACK-M card Legacy Gateway connection: •...
Page 466: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Legacy-Gw1/Legacy-Gw2-Card Property - Opb3
Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information. The following programming items are specific to when programming legacy gateways using Web Maintenance Console: Shelf Indicates the shelf position of the KX-NS1000 for the legacy gateway in which the OPB3 card is installed (reference only). Default Not stored...
Page 467 9.28.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3 Default Current status Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: There is a communication error. Maintenance Console Location 9.28.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3 Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 468: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Doorphone Card-Card Property
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Status Specifies the port’s status.
Page 469 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property Value Range 32 ´ n (n=2–255) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property For Sensor - Input Signal Detection Reopening Time Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor will be ignored.
Page 470: Pbx Configuration-[1-2] Configuration-Portable Station
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. PS Registration and De-registration A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below;...
Page 471 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Click Close. Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None". Personal Identification Number Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong PBX.
Page 472 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Feature Manual References 15.1.24 PS (Portable Station) 22.1.6 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 473 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Feature Manual References 15.1.24 PS (Portable Station) Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 474: Pbx Configuration-[1-3] Configuration-Option
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option System options can be programmed. System Wireless—System ID Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only). To clear the System ID Click the Clear Master CS button. A warning will be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning, and then click Yes. Note The System ID can be cleared using this procedure only in Off-line mode.
Page 475 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard Mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is...
Page 476: Pbx Configuration-[1-4] Configuration-Clock Priority
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority Shelf-Slot Number Selects and prioritizes slot numbers for PRI cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX. Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides. To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below: Assign a Clock Priority to each slot.
Page 477: Pbx Configuration-[1-5] Configuration-Dsp Resource
9.33.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for various functions of the PBX. The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyzes the configuration and user requirements for the system in order to recommend which DSP card(s) should be used.
Page 478 9.33.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Maintenance Console Location 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Manual References 5.1.18 DSP Resource Usage Services—VoIP (G.711) Specifies the number of simultaneous VoIP calls to reserve DSP resources for. Default Value Range 0–506 VoIP calls Maintenance Console Location 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Manual References...
Page 479 9.33.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Maintenance Console Location 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Manual References 5.1.18 DSP Resource Usage Services—OGM Specifies the number of OGM ports to reserve DSP resources for. Default Value Range 0–64 ports Maintenance Console Location 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Manual References 5.1.18 DSP Resource Usage...
Page 480 9.33.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Maintenance Console Location 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Manual References 5.1.18 DSP Resource Usage Select a time to apply the set values Specifies when the settings made on this screen are applied. Note Any calls being made that use DSP resources will be disconnected when setting values are changed and applied.
Page 481: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-1] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Setting-Dsp Resource Advisor
9.33.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.33.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX functions. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on the DSP cards installed in the PBX.
Page 482: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-2] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Usage
9.33.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage 9.33.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyze usage patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 483: Pbx Configuration-[2] System
Section 10 PBX Configuration—[2] System This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 484: Pbx Configuration-[2-1] System-Date & Time
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting 10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS).
Page 485: Pbx Configuration-[2-1-2] System-Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
Page 486 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving SNTP—SNTP Server—IP Address Specifies the IP address or host name of the SNTP server. Default Not stored Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 253 characters (host name) Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Manual References 2.1.8 Automatic Time Adjustment SNTP—SNTP Server—Port Number...
Page 487 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Manual References 2.1.8 Automatic Time Adjustment SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone for PC Indicates the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone of the PC (reference only). Default Not applicable Value Range -14:00–+14:00 Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &...
Page 488: Pbx Configuration-[2-1-2] System-Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving-Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
Page 489 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Manual References 2.1.8 Automatic Time Adjustment End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Default Year: 2011 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving Times.) Month: 11 Day: Day of the first Sunday of the month...
Page 490: Pbx Configuration-[2-2] System-Operator & Bgm
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified. PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 491 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM Feature Manual References 13.1.4 Music on Hold 3.1.2 BGM (Background Music) BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold Selects the audio source for Music on Hold. Default BGM1 Value Range Tone, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8 Maintenance Console Location 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator &...
Page 492: Pbx Configuration-[2-3] System-Timers & Counters
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being canceled. Default Value Range 0–10...
Page 493 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 0–15 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 17.1.1 Redial, Last Number Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialing when the Hot Line feature is set.
Page 494 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Dial—Extension Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialed before the PBX sends a reorder tone. Default Value Range 1–250 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 2.1.5 Automatic Extension Release Dial—Analogue CO First Digit...
Page 495 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Dial—Analogue CO Call Duration Start Specifies the length of time between the end of dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analog CO line calls. Default Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 496 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 0 (disable the Hold Recall)–240 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 4.1.4 Call Hold Recall—Transfer Recall Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension.
Page 497 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.7 Call Park Recall—Disconnect after Recall Specifies the length of time after an extension with a CO line call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the held call is disconnected.
Page 498 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Default Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 2.1.5 Automatic Extension Release Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in hands-free mode. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires.
Page 499 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References 5.1.10 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line. Default Value Range 0.0–12.0 s...
Page 500 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 5.1.10 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates. Default Value Range 0–5 s...
Page 501 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected. Default Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References...
Page 502 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 60 ´ n (n = 0–7) s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References 5.1.10 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM.
Page 503 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References 5.1.10 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) Doorphone—Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is canceled when there is no answer. Default Value Range 10 ´...
Page 504 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Doorphone—Open Duration Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension. Default Value Range 2–7 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Manual References 5.1.14 Door Open...
Page 505 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 19.1.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings. Default Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–30) s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 19.1.4 Timed Reminder Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer...
Page 506 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 4.1.18 Conference Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference.
Page 507 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analog line from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
Page 508 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 6.1.12 External Sensor Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DID number from a public network. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
Page 509 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status. Default Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 510 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialed from a PT or PS during a conversation. Default 160 ms Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 511 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Default Value Range 0–30 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Feature Manual References 15.1.16 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group Conference Group Call—Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring.
Page 512 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Default Value Range 5, 10, 15 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 4.1.8 Call Pickup PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 513: Pbx Configuration-[2-4] System-Week Table
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Page 514 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Value Range 00:00–23:59 Maintenance Console Location 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Feature Manual References 19.1.2 Tenant Service 19.1.3 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each break period. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 515 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 2. Break—Break 1–3 End—Hour, Minute Specifies the end time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting is set to Enable. Default 00:00 Value Range 00:00–23:59 Maintenance Console Location 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Feature Manual References 19.1.2 Tenant Service...
Page 516: Pbx Configuration-[2-5] System-Holiday Table
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. You can click the UM Holiday Table tab to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging system.
Page 517 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Programming Manual References 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— Start Date (Month Day) Holiday Table—Start Date—Day Specifies the day of the holiday start date. Default Value Range 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Time Service Programming Manual References...
Page 518 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Default Value Range 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Time Service Programming Manual References 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— End Date (Month Day) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 519: Pbx Configuration-[2-6] System-Numbering Plan
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs in a network can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "7.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Manual.
Page 520 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Extension Numbering Scheme 5–20, 32–64: Not stored. Value Range Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9— Extension / Mailbox Setting—Mailbox Number Synchronization with Extension Number 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings...
Page 521: Trunk Group Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Feature Manual References 14.1.9 Operator Features Idle Line Access (Local Access) Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call by Idle Line Access (selects an idle CO line automatically).
Page 522 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main TIE Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call. Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Manual References 15.1.12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES...
Page 523: Doorphone Call
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Manual References 18.1.9 Speed Dialing, Personal 18.1.10 Speed Dialing, System Personal Speed Dialing - Programming Specifies the feature number used to program Personal Speed Dialing numbers at an extension. Default Value Range Max.
Page 524: Group Paging
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Group Paging Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group. Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Feature Manual References 15.1.1 Paging...
Page 525: Single Co Line Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Manual References 14.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
Page 526: Directed Call Pickup
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Group Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group. Default Value Range Max.
Page 527: Group Paging Answer
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 4.1.8 Call Pickup TAFAS Answer Specifies the feature number used to answer a CO line call notified through an external pager. Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
Page 528 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 2.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA.
Page 529: Account Code Entry
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Feature Manual References 22.1.6 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Account Code Entry Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code. Default Value Range Max.
Page 530: Door Open
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 4.1.4 Call Hold Call Park / Call Park Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone. Default Value Range Max.
Page 531 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Manual References 5.1.14 Door Open External Relay Access Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay.
Page 532 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 6.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access) SIP Refer(Blind) Specifies the feature number used to perform a blind transfer from the PBX to the SIP CO line. Note This feature is not available from a SIP extension.
Page 533 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 15.1.20 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation) CLIR Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel CLIR, which suppresses the presentation of the caller’s number to the called party.
Page 534 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 4.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) MCID Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This feature can be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 535 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 5.1.13 DND (Do Not Disturb) 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming CO line calls. Default *711 Value Range...
Page 536 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 5.1.13 DND (Do Not Disturb) 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD No Answer Timer Set Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded. Default *713 Value Range Max.
Page 537 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming CO line calls to an incoming call distribution group. Default *715 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
Page 538: Walking Extension
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 4.1.8 Call Pickup Paging Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging your extension).
Page 539 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Data Line Security Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other extensions during data transmission). Default *730 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References...
Page 540 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 4.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other extensions from joining your conversation). Default *733 Value Range Max.
Page 541: Incoming Call Queue Monitor
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Log-in / Log-out Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group. Default *736 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References...
Page 542 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Feature Manual References 9.1.6 Hot Line...
Page 543 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM Feature Manual References 3.1.2 BGM (Background Music) Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call) Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely (Wake-up Call). Default *76* Value Range...
Page 544 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Feature Manual References 15.1.10 Printing Message Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain CO line calls and change the forwarding destination, using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Page 545 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Time Service Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature. Default *782 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
Page 546: Extension Feature Clear
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Extension Feature Clear Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values. Default *790 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 6.1.9 Extension Feature Clear...
Page 547: Busy Out Cancel
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Conference Group Call Operation Specifies the feature number used to make a conference group call. Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 548: Other Pbx Extension
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Default *785 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5— Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue Other PBX Extension Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network.
Page 549: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-2] System-Numbering Plan-Quick Dial
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dialing numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialing numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public CO Lines"...
Page 550 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Dial Specifies the Quick Dialing number. Default Not stored Value Range 1–4000: Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Feature Manual References 16.1.1 Quick Dialing 15.1.23 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) 7.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Phone Number...
Page 551: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-3] System-Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/ NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "7.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering"...
Page 552 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy Override 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Manual References 6.1.7 Executive Busy Override Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice...
Page 553: Automatic Callback Busy
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Default Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Call Monitor 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—...
Page 554 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—...
Page 555: Pbx Configuration-[2-7] System-Class Of Service
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 512 COS levels can be programmed.
Page 556 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 7: Restricts all CO line calls Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 557: Trs Level For System Speed Dialing
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings TRS Level for System Speed Dialing Specifies the TRS level for making a CO line call using System Speed Dialing numbers, which overrides the TRS set for the current time mode. Default Value Range 1: Allows all CO line calls 2–6: Restricts CO line calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all CO line calls...
Page 558: Transfer To Co
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit Enables the extension-to-CO line call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) on 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 559: Account Code Mode
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Call Forward to CO Enables the forwarding of calls to CO lines. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 560 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Assistant...
Page 561: Dnd Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 4.1.8 Call Pickup DND Override...
Page 562 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Manual References 4.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES 22.1.5 Whisper OHCA Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 563: Executive Busy Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 9.1.1 Hands-free Answerback Executive COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.22 COS (Class of Service) Call Monitor...
Page 564: Executive Busy Override Deny
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Manual References 6.1.7 Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Deny Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.
Page 565 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.22 COS (Class of Service) Group Forward Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group. Default Enable-Group Value Range...
Page 566 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Manual References 15.1.29 PT Programming Manager Specifies the authorization to use manager features. Default COS No.1–63: Disable COS No.64: Enable Value Range Disable, Enable...
Page 567 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Time Service PDN/SDN An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at each COS level.
Page 568 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN— COS Name Feature Manual References 15.1.4 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension SDN Key Assignment by PT Program Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.
Page 569: Door Unlock
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.22 COS (Class of Service) Door Unlock Enables using the door opener feature. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 570 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References 5.1.10 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) Remote Operation by Other Extension...
Page 571 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Allow, Deny Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Manual References 22.1.6 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode COS Name Specifies the name of the COS.
Page 572 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA— CA ICD Group Log Feature Manual References 4.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant) CA ICD Group Log Out Enables logging out of ICD groups when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client. Default Enable Value Range...
Page 573 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Conference Group Call Operation Enables making conference group calls. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—...
Page 574: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-2] System-Class Of Service-External Call Block
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making CO line calls, depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–96 Specifies the available trunk groups.
Page 575: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-3] System-Class Of Service-Internal Call Block
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
Page 576: Pbx Configuration-[2-8] System-Ring Tone Patterns
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming CO line calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on.
Page 577: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-2] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 578: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-3] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 579 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Call Back—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy. Default S-Double Value Range Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—...
Page 580 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Maintenance Console Location 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 581: Pbx Configuration-[2-9] System-System Options
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Default Month-Date Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options...
Page 582 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 6.1.10 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number) PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated. Default Flash Value Range...
Page 583 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 5.1.13 DND (Do Not Disturb) 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) 12.1.1 LED Indication PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button customized on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.) Default FWD/DND Setting Mode...
Page 584 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 15.1.1 Paging PT Fwd / DND—Extension Status of Mobile Integration (FWD NA to CO) Specifies whether an extension is shown as idle or busy when it forwards a call to a CO line on no answer. Default Idle Value Range...
Page 585 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Default Enable Value Range Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display. Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 15.1.11 Privacy Release PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key...
Page 586 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 17.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is established automatically when it receives a call from a CO line.
Page 587 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.4 Call Hold PT Operation—Hold key mode Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without Announcement feature. Default Hold Value Range Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call. Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call.
Page 588 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 6.1.9 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pick-up Dial) Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed. Default Clear Value Range Clear, Do not clear...
Page 589 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options CODEC—Priority Notification from SIP Network (for Incoming Call) Specifies whether the priority notification from the SIP network is used in place of the PBX’s codec priority for SIP CO lines. Default Disable Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode...
Page 590 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration Feature Manual References 17.1.1 Redial, Last Number Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory Specifies whether any digits dialed after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.
Page 591 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) Feature Manual References...
Page 592 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 5.1.15 Doorphone Call 4.1.20 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
Page 593 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature. Default Enable Value Range...
Page 594 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.18 Conference 4.1.20 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds a call. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable...
Page 595 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 5.1.5 Dial Tone Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialing.
Page 596 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO Enables the use of echo canceling for CO-to-CO line calls. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line Enables the use of echo canceling for extension-to-analog CO line calls. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 597 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range On or Flash, Off Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.8 Call Pickup 12.1.1 LED Indication DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to "ON or Flash".
Page 598 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.8 Call Pickup DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current call or places the call on consultation hold. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 599 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 9.1.1 Hands-free Answerback Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call from a public network.
Page 600 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 15.1.12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party) Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that performed the transfer.
Page 601 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent. Enable: The CLIP number of the calling extension is sent. Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 10.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations 4.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) 15.1.15 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group...
Page 602: Walking Cos
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Programming Manual References 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Parameter Selection (for SDN) Feature Manual References 15.1.4 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using the Hands-free Answerback feature.
Page 603 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 5 SLT—SLT Hold Mode Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "4.1.4 Call Hold" in the Feature Manual. Default Mode 2 Value Range Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4 Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options...
Page 604 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 22.1.5 Whisper OHCA Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call Selects whether Busy Station Signaling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy extension. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References...
Page 605 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, DOORPHONE Call, Door Open, Relay On, External BGM, Paging Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network.
Page 606 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 6 (CTI) Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call Control CTI such as Communication Assistant (CA). Default Value Range 0–60 s...
Page 607 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.24 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) 3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Page 608 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Default Value Range 0–10 Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.24 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) CTI Make Call—SLT Ring Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT. Default Enable Value Range...
Page 609 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options • Calls rerouted via the Intercept Routing—Busy feature. If this setting is enabled, calls are recorded as "Not Answered". Default Enable (Not Answered) Value Range Enable (Not Answered), Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.5 Call Log, Incoming Incoming Call Log—Fwd All/Fwd Busy...
Page 610 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.5 Call Log, Incoming Incoming Call Log—Extension / TIE Call Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are recorded in the answering extension’s incoming call log. Default Enable Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.5 Call Log, Incoming...
Page 611 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3: G.729, G.711, G.722, None Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 15.1.5 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group—Video Conference Specifies the availability of video conferencing for capable extensions within P2P groups. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 612 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Default 8 Party Value Range 8 Party, 32 Party Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Manual References 4.1.18 Conference 4.1.19 Conference Group Call Option 9 Extension / Mailbox Setting—Mailbox Number Synchronization with Extension Number Enables the synchronization of Mailbox Number and Extension Number settings.
Page 613 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 8.1 Users—User Profiles 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Number 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Number 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—...
Page 614: Pbx Configuration-[2-10] System-Extension Cid Settings
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Default Bell202(Bellcore) Value Range...
Page 615: Caller Id Signal Type
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Caller ID Channel Seizure Wait Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Page 616 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Caller ID Send Caller ID Date & Time to Extension Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Default Enable Value Range...
Page 617 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Caller ID FSK Transmission Level Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation. Default 0 dB Value Range -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB Maintenance Console Location...
Page 618: Pbx Configuration-[2-11] System-Audio Gain
Therefore, when operating in a One-look network, if different PBX models are registered as Slave units, the corresponding common values are used. Default KX-NS1000 Value Range KX-NS1000, KX-NS700, KX-NS500, KX-NS300 Maintenance Console Location 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Feature Manual References 14.1.4 One-look Network...
Page 619 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Feature Manual References 15.1.1 Paging Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT. Default 0 dB Value Range -15 dB, -12 dB, -9 dB, -6 dB, -3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH...
Page 620 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Internal MOH—MOH 1–8 (Music on Hold 1–8) Specifies the music volume for each internal BGM (MOH 1–8). MOH numbers that cannot be set according to the model selected in PBX Model will be grayed out. Default MOH 1-7: -10 dB Value Range...
Page 621: Pbx Configuration-[2-11-2] System-Audio Gain-Card
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Default 0 dB Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB...
Page 622 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 623: Pbx Configuration-[3] Group
Section 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 624: Pbx Configuration-[3-1] Group-Trunk Group
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings CO lines can be organized into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all CO lines in the group. A maximum of 96 trunk groups can be programmed. For more information on trunk groups, see "8.1.1 GROUP FEATURES"...
Page 625: Line Hunting Order
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Manual References 15.1.12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Line Hunting Order Specifies the CO line hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered CO lines, or to rotate uniformly among all CO lines. Default High ->...
Page 626 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Default Value Range None, 1–60 (´ 60 s) Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation Caller ID Modification Table...
Page 627 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialing Plan Tone Detection Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference. Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 628: Host Pbx Access Code
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings DISA Tone Detection—Continuous Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated CO-to-CO line call by continuous signal detection. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &...
Page 629 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Host PBX Access Code 1–10 Specifies the feature number used to access a CO line from the host PBX.
Page 630: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-2] Group-Trunk Group-Local Access Priority
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a CO line call by Idle Line Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle CO line according to the priority assigned here. Trunk Group No.
Page 631: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-3] Group-Trunk Group-Caller Id Modification
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
Page 632 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Maintenance Console Location 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits.
Page 633 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Default Value Range 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Manual References...
Page 634 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Default Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—...
Page 635 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used for sending to the network as a CLIP number. A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the Modification Table list.
Page 636 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Caller ID PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 637: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Trunk Group-Dialing Plan
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialing Plan 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialing Plan The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after an extension user completes dialing. The PBX can recognize the end of dialing when the dialed telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
Page 638 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialing Plan Maintenance Console Location 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialing Plan Feature Manual References 10.1.18 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the number dialed by en-bloc dialing in the place of the removed digits. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 639: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Dialing Plan-Auto Assign
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialing Plan 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Dialing Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialing plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialing plan table.
Page 640: Pbx Configuration-[3-2] Group-User Group
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups.
Page 641 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group Maintenance Console Location 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 8.1.1 GROUP FEATURES 19.1.2 Tenant Service Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 642: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 96 call pickup groups can be programmed. To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Page 643 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group – User Group 1–32: 36: – User Group 33–96: 37: Pickup Group 6th – User Group 1–32: 37: – User Group 33–96: 38: Pickup Group 7th – User Group 1–32: 38: – User Group 33–96: 39: Pickup Group 8th –...
Page 644: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group-All Setting
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups. Call Pickup Group Name Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Page 645 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting User Group 1–256 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group. Default User Group 1–32: ON for the same-numbered call pickup group User Group 33–96: ON Value Range ON (blue), OFF Maintenance Console Location 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting Programming Manual References...
Page 646: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Page 647 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Paging Group 8th: None Value Range None, 01–256 Maintenance Console Location 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 15.1.1 Paging 8.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 648: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-All Setting
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Specifies the name of the paging group.
Page 649 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting Feature Manual References 15.1.1 Paging 8.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 650: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-External
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 651: Pbx Configuration-[3-5] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed.
Page 652 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 10.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution Call Waiting Distribution Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group. Default Distribution Value Range...
Page 653 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings DND Mode Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group. Default No Ring Value Range No Ring, Ring Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND...
Page 654: Overflow Queuing Busy
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 19.1.2 Tenant Service Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a CO line, the TRS assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.
Page 655 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Default Groups 001–064: 601–664 Groups 065–128: Not stored Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Default ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128 Value Range...
Page 656: Overflow No Answer
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Default Value Range None, 1–100 Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 10.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing Overflow No Answer Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Default Groups 001–064: 601–664 Groups 065–128: Not stored...
Page 657 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Manual References 10.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing 10.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow...
Page 658: Queuing Time Table
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 10.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing Queuing Time Table Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Default Groups 001–064: 601–664 Groups 065–128: Not stored...
Page 659 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Manual References 10.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.
Page 660: Extension No Answer Redirection Time
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Extension No Answer Redirection Time Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method. Default None Value Range...
Page 661 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 10.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution Status of FWD for Virtual PS Specifies whether a virtual PS in an ICD group is shown as idle or busy when it forwards a call to a CO line on no answer.
Page 662 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 10.1.9 ICD Group Features—VIP Call Supervisor Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT.
Page 663 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Default Groups 001–064: 601–664 Groups 065–128: Not stored Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Default ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128 Value Range...
Page 664 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Group FWD Call from CO—Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming CO line calls directed to the incoming call distribution group. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 665 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Default Not stored Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret] and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 666: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-1] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Page 667: Delayed Ring
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group Feature Manual References 10.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES Delayed Ring Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.) Default Immediate...
Page 668 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer Feature Manual References 10.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 669: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-2] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 128 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed. Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16 Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Page 670: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-3] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group when ICD Member Answered Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Page 671 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Default Group DN Value Range Group DN, Enhanced Phantom Maintenance Console Location 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Programming Manual References 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Delayed Ring Feature Manual References 10.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES Options—Longest Idle Distribution...
Page 672 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group. Maintenance Console Location 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Programming Manual References 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—...
Page 673 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Maintenance Console Location 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES 10.1.8 ICD Group Features—Supervisory Feature (ACD) 17.1.3 Room Status Control Options—Call Log for Built-in ACD Report—ICD Group Unanswered Call Log Specifies whether to log call information of unanswered calls when the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform Call Distribution or Priority Hunting, for the Built-in ACD Report.
Page 674 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Default Average waiting time Value Range Average waiting time: The average wait time is used for calculating the announced amount of wait time. Predefined time: A set amount of time (10–3600 s) is used for calculating the announced amount of wait time. Maintenance Console Location 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Manual References...
Page 675 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing Options—ICD Group Distribution order Select the distribution method for member extensions that belong to multiple ICD groups and become idle. Default FIFO Value Range FIFO, Circular Maintenance Console Location 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Manual References...
Page 676: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-4] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Acd Supervisor
11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor This screen is only available at Installer level. Description After specifying an ICD Group to be monitored, specify a User (User) or User (Administrator) as an ACD supervisor to begin monitoring.
Page 677: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a preprogrammed hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 678 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group Feature Manual References...
Page 679: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group-Member List
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to program from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.
Page 680: Pbx Configuration-[3-7] Group-Um Group
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings 11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc. When a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice message or dial a number to reach the desired party.
Page 681 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings Programming Manual References 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Manual References 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES—UM Ports and the UM Group Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group...
Page 682 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings Programming Manual References 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property Feature Manual References 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES—UM Ports and the UM Group PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 683: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. In a One-look network, each PBX has its own UM group, and each group has its own floating extension number.
Page 684 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Feature Manual References 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES—UM Ports and the UM Group Site name Indicates the Site Name of the PBX that UM group belongs to (reference only). Default VM Unit No.1: 01:NS1000 VM Unit No.2–16: Not stored Value Range Site Name Maintenance Console Location...
Page 685: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group. Indicates the UM port number (reference only). Default Current unit number Value Range 1–24 Maintenance Console Location 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References...
Page 686 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Default 1 : Voicemail 1 Value Range UM Group number and name Maintenance Console Location 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Feature Manual References 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES—UM Ports and the UM Group PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 687: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 512 PS extensions.
Page 688 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group Default Caller ID Value Range Caller ID, Called Number Maintenance Console Location 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group Feature Manual References 15.1.27 PS—Ring Group PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 689: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group-Member List
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 512 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to program from the PS Ring Group Number list. To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Page 690 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List Feature Manual References 15.1.27 PS—Ring Group PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 691: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups.
Page 692 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Ability to Talk Enables PT, SLT and PS users to use the push-to-talk feature during a conference group call, when Broadcast Mode is set to "Enable". The push-to-talk feature allows PT, SLT and PS users to speak during the call by pressing any of their dial keys.
Page 693: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group-Member List
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to program from the Conference Group No. list. When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Page 694 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List Feature Manual References 4.1.19 Conference Group Call PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 695: Pbx Configuration-[3-10] Group-P2P Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed. P2P Group Name Specifies the name of the P2P group. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Manual References 15.1.5 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Bandwidth Control...
Page 696: Pbx Configuration-[3-11] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group
11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBXs. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. Settings for these groups can be programmed.
Page 697: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 698: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) for DPT Type—Type in the extension’s Port Property screen will be displayed. For details, see To access port properties in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 699: Pbx Configuration-[3-12] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group
11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBXs. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. Settings for these groups can be programmed.
Page 700: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 701: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List Select the group to program from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Page 702 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 703: Pbx Configuration-[4] Extension
Section 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 704: Pbx Configuration-[4-1] Extension-Wired Extension
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and click Find Next.
Page 705 OPX: T1-OPX port (T1) CS: CS is connected. IP-PT: IP-PT belonging to the V-IPEXT card is connected. P-SIP: Panasonic SIP Phone is connected. UT: KX-UT series SIP phone is connected. SIP: General SIP Extension is connected. CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
Page 706 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Default 1: Extensions other than IP-PTs and KX-UT series SIP phones. 31: IP-PTs and KX-UT series SIP phones.
Page 707 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed. Changing PINs frequently. To change an extension PIN: Click Edit under Extension PIN for the extension to change. In the window that appears, enter the new extension PIN and then enter it again to confirm it. Click OK.
Page 708 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and Intercept Routing–DND. Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy below.
Page 709 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each...
Page 710 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 711 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number or 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port. Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP—...
Page 712 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 713 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 1 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 714 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension. Default Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Manual References...
Page 715 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.10 Call Transfer ARS Itemized Code Specifies the itemized billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for accounting and billing purposes. Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 716 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Default Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker W-OHCA: Voice from the handset Maintenance Console Location...
Page 717 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Feature Manual References 9.1.6 Hot Line Pickup Dial No.
Page 718 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 3 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 719 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Default Disable Value Range Display & Tone1, Display & Tone2, Display & Tone3, Display only, Disable Note • Supported terminals are: DPT, DPT (S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid (S-DPT), IP-EXT • Depending on system programming, the number of terminals may be limited to 256. For more information, consult your dealer.
Page 720 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 2.1.1 Absent Message Intercom Call by Voice Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call. Default Tone Call Value Range...
Page 721 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Default ICM/PDN Value Range No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle CO line is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
Page 722 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Call Waiting Tone Type Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension. Default CW Tone 1 Value Range CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.12 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode...
Page 723 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 9.1.2 Hands-free Operation 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES Option 5 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 724 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display. Default Caller ID Name Value Range Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 5.1.11 Display Information...
Page 725 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Automatic Answer for CO Call Enables the extension to answer an incoming CO line call automatically after a certain number of rings without going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.
Page 726 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Forced Automatic Answer Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and CO line calls) without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting. Default Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch...
Page 727: Paging Deny
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Default Unlock Value Range Unlock, Lock Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.5 Call Log, Incoming Paging Deny Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 728 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters. Default Table 1 Value Range Table 1: Standard mode Table 2: Option mode Maintenance Console Location...
Page 729 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.5 Call Log, Incoming Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialed by the extension that are retained in the extension’s Outgoing Call Log memory.
Page 730 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 8 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 731: Slt Mw Mode
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Caller ID Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the previous unanswered call.
Page 732 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group. This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on"...
Page 733 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Default Immediate Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
Page 734 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.13 CELLULAR PHONE FEATURES FWD / DND Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND.
Page 735 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Page 736 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 737 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Keep ring after FWD NA to CO Specifies whether an extension continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD N/A or FWD Busy N/A. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
Page 738: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-1] Extension-Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip Generate
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 739 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Parameter—Deleting Digits Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the CLIP number. Default Value Range 0–5 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References...
Page 740 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 741: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-2] Extension-Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and CO line calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 742: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-3] Extension-Wired Extension-Speed Dial
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial Personal Speed Dialing allows extension users to dial frequently dialed numbers using two-digit speed dialing numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialing numbers can be programmed for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 743: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Overview Each flexible button can be customized to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible buttons can be customized for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 744 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND (Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd (Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, CLIR, COLR, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN, DN...
Page 745 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 4.1.16 CO Line Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone. Default Automatic Value Range Automatic, Specific Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
Page 746 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Time Service Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Specifies the TRS level to be used temporarily on a certain extension. Default Level 1 Value Range Level 1–Level 7...
Page 747 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Default Immediate Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References...
Page 748 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set FWD remotely whose intercom and CO line calls will be forwarded.
Page 749 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Default Not stored Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) 7.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button Extension Number (for Call Log) Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed.
Page 750 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection). Default Not stored Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References...
Page 751 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the desired mailbox. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References...
Page 752 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 One-touch Dialing buttons for extensions. Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 753 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 12 characters Note The maximum length for KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 labels is 10 characters. Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 11.1.1 KX-UT Series SIP Phones 18.1.1 Simple Remote Connection Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Page 754 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Page 755: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.
Page 756: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-5] Extension-Wired Extension-Pf Button
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customized to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customized for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 757: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-6] Extension-Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 758: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-7] Extension-Wired Extension-Clip Id Table
12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wired extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the extension (reference only). Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max.
Page 759: Pbx Configuration-[4-2] Extension-Portable Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 512 PSs can be programmed. To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
Page 760 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Property Indicates the property (reference only). Default Portable Station Value Range Portable Station Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs.
Page 761 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.22 COS (Class of Service) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the PS. CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
Page 762 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
Page 763 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References...
Page 764 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
Page 765 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a CO line call.
Page 766 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID Feature Manual References 4.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network CO line call.
Page 767 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Not stored Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Two-way Recording...
Page 768 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 769 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 17.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration. Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 770 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Feature Manual References 21.1.1 Verification Code Entry 2.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection) Option 2 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 771 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES Automatic C. Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from a CO line, a doorphone call or a call via an incoming call distribution group.
Page 772 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 9.1.6 Hot Line Pickup Dial No. Specifies the number to be dialed automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References...
Page 773 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions. Default Disable Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS...
Page 774 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 2.1.1 Absent Message Option 4 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 775 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Default ICM/PDN Value Range No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle CO line is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
Page 776 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Call Waiting Tone Type Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension. Default CW Tone 1 Value Range CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.12 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode...
Page 777 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 778 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 5.1.11 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a CO line call. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings...
Page 779 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialing buttons.
Page 780 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters. Default Table 1 Value Range...
Page 781 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.5 Call Log, Incoming Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialed by the PS that are retained in the PS’s Outgoing Call Log memory.
Page 782 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 8 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 783 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group. This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on"...
Page 784 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Default Immediate Value Range...
Page 785 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant) Mobile Extension Specifies whether to enable or disable mobile extension features (with a cellular phone or other outside destination) for the extension. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References...
Page 786 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name FWD Mode for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding type of incoming CO line calls (reference only). Default None Value Range...
Page 787 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Default None Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
Page 788 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Keep ring after FWD NA to CO Specifies whether a PS continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD N/A or FWD Busy N/A.
Page 789 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 790: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-1] Extension-Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 791 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Parameter—Deleting Digits Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the CLIP number. Default Value Range 0–4 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References...
Page 792 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 793: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-2] Extension-Portable Station-Fwd/Dnd
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and CO line calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
Page 794: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Each flexible button can be customized to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible buttons can be customized for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
Page 795 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Default Value Range 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 4.1.16 CO Line Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone.
Page 796 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 10.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Selects which time modes are switched manually. Default Value Range All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Time Service Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Page 797 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options is set to "Enable".
Page 798 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Message Waiting) Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked.
Page 799 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) 7.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set FWD remotely whose intercom calls will be forwarded.
Page 800 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Default Not stored Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 10.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing Extension Number (for Two-way Record) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the PS’s mailbox. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 801 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the desired mailbox. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES Extension Number (for SDN)
Page 802 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 One-touch Dialing buttons for PSs. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References...
Page 803 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Time Service Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Page 804: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.
Page 805: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-4] Extension-Portable Station-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 806: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-5] Extension-Portable Station-Clip Id Table
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wireless extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range Max.
Page 807: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-6] Extension-Portable Station-Single Co Appearance
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Single CO Appearance 12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Single CO Appearance It is possible to display CO line information in real time on the display of a KX-WT125 when PS soft buttons are assigned as Single CO buttons. Parameter Selection Selects the CO line to be displayed on the PS.
Page 808: Pbx Configuration-[4-3] Extension-Dss Console
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT connected to the same PBX. The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in the Port Property screen of the extension card that the DSS console is connected to.
Page 809: Pbx Configuration-[5] Optional Device
Section 13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 810: Pbx Configuration-[5-1] Optional Device-Doorphone
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting). The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 811 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Manual References 5.1.15 Doorphone Call Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 812 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Default Value Range 1–512 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block Feature Manual References 10.1.15 Internal Call Block 5.1.15 Doorphone Call...
Page 813 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 814: Pbx Configuration-[5-2] Optional Device-External
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View). Indicates the Site ID corresponding to the site numbers of PBXs in the One-look network (reference only).
Page 815 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Maintenance Console Location 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Feature Manual References 15.1.1 Paging 19.1.1 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station) 3.1.2 BGM (Background Music) Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 816: Pbx Configuration-[5-3] Optional Device-Voice Message
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "5.1.10 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)"...
Page 817 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Maintenance Console Location 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets DND Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting. Default Busy Tone Value Range...
Page 818 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Default Enable Value Range Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port is released when a CO line-to-public CO line call using DISA is established. Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call. Maintenance Console Location 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References...
Page 819 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Enable (Get DISA): CO line-to-public CO line calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect the end of the call. Maintenance Console Location 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—...
Page 820 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System CO-CO with DISA—Return to DISA Top Menu by DTMF "*" Enables a CO line caller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing " " while hearing a ringback, reorder, or busy tone. If disabled, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ". Default Enable Value Range...
Page 821: Pbx Configuration-[5-3-2] Optional Device-Voice Message-Disa Message
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 822 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Default Not stored Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References 14.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message) 5.1.10 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) Busy / DND Message No.
Page 823 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References 2.1.6 Automatic Fax Transfer Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 824: Pbx Configuration-[5-4] Optional Device-External Relay
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Settings related to external relays can be programmed. Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the DOORPHONE card’s property settings. (® 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property) The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 825 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Default Value Range 1–7 s Maintenance Console Location 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Feature Manual References 6.1.11 External Relay COS Number Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to activate relays.
Page 826: Pbx Configuration-[5-5] Optional Device-External Sensor
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Settings related to external sensors can be programmed. To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting). The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 827 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Feature Manual References 6.1.12 External Sensor Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Default Value Range...
Page 828 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Maintenance Console Location 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Feature Manual References 6.1.12 External Sensor 19.1.2 Tenant Service Sensor Alarm—Email Address Specifies the e-mail address that will receive a notification when the sensor detects an alarm. Default Not stored Value Range...
Page 829: Pbx Configuration-[6] Feature
Section 14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 830: Pbx Configuration-[6-1] Feature-System Speed Dial
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial The System Speed Dialing Table is used to store frequently dialed numbers as well as callers who should be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The System Speed Dialing Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
Page 831 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Default Not stored Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Manual References 18.1.9 Speed Dialing, Personal 18.1.10 Speed Dialing, System 4.1.3 Caller ID CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Specifies the telephone number (including the CO Line Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialing number.
Page 832 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Programming Manual References 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Manual References 4.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution...
Page 833: Pbx Configuration-[6-2] Feature-Hotel
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Default Extension 1: 101 Value Range Max.
Page 834 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel Default No Print Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel Programming Manual References 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) 19.1.4 Timed Reminder SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension.
Page 835 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel Feature Manual References 19.1.4 Timed Reminder Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 836: Pbx Configuration-[6-3] Feature-Verification Code
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS) of the extension in use to make a certain CO line call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.
Page 837 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed. Changing PINs frequently.
Page 838 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Programming Manual References 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Feature Manual References 2.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 839: Pbx Configuration-[6-4] Feature-Second Dial Tone
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialed after seizing a CO line, a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
Page 840: Pbx Configuration-[6-5] Feature-Absent Message
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.
Page 841: Pbx Configuration-[6-6] Feature-Tenant
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant A maximum of 32 or 128 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No.
Page 842: Ars Mode
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Feature Manual References 19.1.2 Tenant Service 14.1.9 Operator Features ARS Mode Specifies the ARS mode used when making a CO line call. Default Same as System Setting Value Range Off: ARS is disabled. On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method.
Page 843 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Feature Manual References 18.1.9 Speed Dialing, Personal 18.1.10 Speed Dialing, System 19.1.2 Tenant Service Time Service Mode Specifies which PBX’s clock in a One-look network is used as reference for the tenant’s Time Service functions and for ICD Group functions. Default Normal Value Range...
Page 844 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 845: Pbx Configuration-[7] Trs
Section 15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 846: Pbx Configuration-[7-1] Trs-Denied Code
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS) prohibits an extension from making certain CO line calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS levels. TRS level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all CO line calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all CO line calls are allowed).
Page 847: Pbx Configuration-[7-2] Trs-Exception Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS) prohibits an extension from making certain CO line calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS levels. TRS level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all CO line calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all CO line calls are allowed).
Page 848: Pbx Configuration-[7-3] Trs-Special Carrier
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time a CO line call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone number only.
Page 849: Pbx Configuration-[7-4] Trs-Emergency Dial
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a CO line. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS), Account Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
Page 850: Pbx Configuration-[7-5] Trs-Miscellaneous
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS) prohibits an extension from making certain CO line calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS check, override TRS, or switch between TRS methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialing Enables an outgoing CO line call to override TRS when the call is made using System Speed Dialing.
Page 851 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Default Disconnect Value Range Disconnect: The CO line is disconnected as soon as the timer expires. Keep: The TRS check is performed when the timer expires. Maintenance Console Location 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 852 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 19.1.5 TRS (Toll Restriction) 6.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access) TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6) Selects the method of TRS to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.
Page 853: Pbx Configuration-[8] Ars
Section 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 854: Pbx Configuration-[8-1] Ars-System Setting
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a CO line call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialed number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
Page 855: Pbx Configuration-[8-2] Ars-Leading Number
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
Page 856 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Routing Plan Number Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number. Default Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Feature Manual References 2.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 857: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
Page 858: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time-Time Setting
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Page 859 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting Maintenance Console Location 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting Feature Manual References 2.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection) Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 860: Pbx Configuration-[8-4] Ars-Routing Plan Priority
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Page 861: Pbx Configuration-[8-5] Ars-Carrier
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Carrier It is possible to specify how user-dialed numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 128 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature. Carrier Name Specifies the carrier name.
Page 862 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Value Range Max. 16 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, #, C, P, A, G, I and H) Maintenance Console Location 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Feature Manual References 2.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection) CLIP Table No. Sets the CLIP numbers established for each extension (wired/wireless) of a carrier. The CLIP IDs for each CLIP number are set in 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table and 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table.
Page 863 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier TRG Priority Selects the order in which trunk groups are seized when making calls via each carrier. Trunk Group—Priority 1–Priority 4 Specifies which trunk group is seized in the order of priority 1 to priority 4. Default None Value Range...
Page 864 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Authorization Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 32 or 128 Specifies the Authorization code of each carrier for each tenant. Note The maximum number of tenants depends on the System Capacity Selection setting made when the Easy Setup Wizard was run for the PBX. If the System Resource Type was selected, the maximum number of tenants is 128.
Page 865: Pbx Configuration-[8-6] Ars-Leading Number Exception
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialed number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a CO line by the Idle Line Access method ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
Page 866: Pbx Configuration-[8-7] Ars-Authorization Code For Trg
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorization Code for TRG 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorization Code for TRG An Authorization code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorization codes entered here can be added to user-dialed numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier.
Page 867: Pbx Configuration-[9] Private Network
Section 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 868: Pbx Configuration-[9-1] Private Network-Tie Table
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the CO line route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
Page 869 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table No. 10: 0 No. 11–32: Not stored Value Range Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Manual References 15.1.12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialed number to be removed for each priority.
Page 870: Trunk Group
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority. Default No. 1–10: 7 No. 11–32: None Value Range None, 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Manual References 15.1.12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Enhanced QSIG...
Page 871 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the voice mail system is attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network. Default Enable Value Range...
Page 872: Pbx Configuration-[9-2] Private Network-Network Data Transmission
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button.
Page 873 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer Feature Manual References 15.1.14 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Data Transmission ISDN->VoIP Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data.
Page 874 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Feature Manual References 15.1.14 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Data Broadcasting Interval Timer Specifies the frequency of BLF data transmission. The PBX will send data over the network periodically according to the interval specified here.
Page 875 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer Specifies the length of time between repeated re-transmission of network message waiting notifications. Default 30 s Value Range 10–240 s Maintenance Console Location 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—...
Page 876: Pbx Configuration-[9-3] Private Network-Network Operator (Voip)
17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8).
Page 877 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator Specifies the slot number of the card used to send extension status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data. Default Undefined Value Range...
Page 878: Pbx Configuration-[9-4] Private Network-Ndss Key Table
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
Page 879 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored Indicates the Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of the PBX that the extension is connected to (reference only). Default Not stored Value Range None, 1–8 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 880: Pbx Configuration-[9-5] Private Network-Centralized Um/Vm Unit
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralized UM/VM Unit 17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralized UM/VM Unit View and program settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 881: Pbx Configuration-[10] Co & Incoming Call
Section 18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call This section serves as reference operating instructions for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 882: Pbx Configuration-[10-1] Co & Incoming Call-Co Line Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings CO lines can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 256 trunk groups. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 883 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Maintenance Console Location 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 8.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 884: Pbx Configuration-[10-2] Co & Incoming Call-Dil Table & Port Settings
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Inward Dialing (DID) can be selected for each CO line as the method of distributing incoming CO line calls to certain destinations.
Page 885 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Manual References 10.1.11 INCOMING CALL FEATURES 15.1.12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming CO line calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each CO line.
Page 886 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Default Value Range 1–32 1–128 Note The maximum number of tenants depends on the System Capacity Selection setting made when the Easy Setup Wizard was run for the PBX.
Page 887 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings VM Trunk Group No. Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group (connected to a KX-NCP/KX-TDE series PBX). The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Page 888 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Manual References 10.1.11 INCOMING CALL FEATURES 15.1.12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming CO line calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each CO line.
Page 889 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings DDI / DID / TIE For each CO line to which DID distribution is set, or for each CO line whose Trunk Property on this screen is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 890 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the CO line through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DID number of the calls Maintenance Console Location 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Manual References 10.1.11 INCOMING CALL FEATURES 5.1.7 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Page 891 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 15.1.12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 892: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Incoming CO line calls with DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DID number, incoming CO line calls with that DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialing Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
Page 893 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Maintenance Console Location 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Programming Manual References 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options— Option—DDI/DID Number &...
Page 894 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table number of tenants is 128. If the SIP Extension Type or IP-Extension Type was selected, the maximum number of tenants is 32. For details, refer to 5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual. Maintenance Console Location 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &...
Page 895 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Programming Manual References 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Manual References...
Page 896: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi/Did Table-Automatic Registration
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DID numbers and DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 897 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Number of Registration Specifies the number of locations to be programmed. Default Value Range 1–1000 Maintenance Console Location 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Manual References 5.1.7 DID (Direct Inward Dialing) Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night...
Page 898: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi/Did Table-Name Generate
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 899 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate No. of Digits to Delete Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of a DID number when using it as part of the DID name. Default Value Range 0–32 Maintenance Console Location 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &...
Page 900 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Manual References 5.1.7 DID (Direct Inward Dialing) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 901: Pbx Configuration-[10-5] Co & Incoming Call-Miscellaneous
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
Page 902 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10.1.13 Intercept Routing—No Destination PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 903: Pbx Configuration-[11] Maintenance
Section 19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 904: Pbx Configuration-[11-1] Maintenance-Main
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Default Type A Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Maintenance Console Location...
Page 905 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Value Range No Print, 4–99 Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines) Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length.
Page 906 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Default Value Range 12H, 24H Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Print Information—Outgoing Call Specifies whether the dialed digits of outgoing CO line calls are printed. Class of Service (COS) programming determines the printable records.
Page 907 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Print Information—Intercom Call Specifies whether the dialed digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed. Default No Print Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Print Information—Log-in / Log-out...
Page 908 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Programming Manual References 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) 17.1.3 Room Status Control Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR. Default No Print Value Range...
Page 909 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 12.1.4 Local Alarm Information SMDR Options Option—ARS Dial Selects the type of the dialed number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature. Default Dial after ARS Modification Value Range Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialed number Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main...
Page 910 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Option—Secret Dial Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial. The secret dial conceals all or part of the dialed number. Note that selecting Dial before ARS Modification in Option—ARS Dial on this screen indicates the dialed numbers as dots regardless of this setting.
Page 911 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Option—Condition Code "RC" Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming CO line call is printed. Default No Print Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Page 912 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Programming Manual References 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Emergency Call Notification Specifies if an emergency call is recorded on SMDR only when the call is completed, or when the call is initially dialed as well.
Page 913 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Default PCCSMDR Value Range Max. 10 characters Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) LAN—New Line Code for Telnet Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator. If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
Page 914 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Programming Manual References 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—RS-232C— Communication—Flow Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Communication—Parity Bit Selects a parity bit code that indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character.
Page 915 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 18.1.6 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Communication—Word Length Specifies the number of bits in each byte of a character. When connecting the Maintenance Console to the PBX using an RS-232C cable, assign the following values to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX: Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: None, Stop Bit: 1 bit Notice...
Page 916 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main External Modem Command—Automatic Initialization Specifies the command to automatically initialize an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX. Default AT&F0Q0E0V1S0=1X0&D0 Value Range Max. 30 characters Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2...
Page 917 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 12.1.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Hour Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time. Default Value Range 0–23 Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 12.1.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time.
Page 918 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog Error Log for UM Port Busy—Detection Busy Threshold Time Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if UM ports were all busy time specified in Detection Busy Threshold Time.
Page 919 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Manual References 15.1.13 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer) Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if the quantity of network message waiting information being re-transmitted is larger than the transmission buffer. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 920: Pbx Configuration-[11-2] Maintenance-Cs Synchronization
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Note CSs connected to legacy gateways can be used together with IP-CSs connected to the KX-NS1000 system. CSs connected to legacy gateways must be registered to Air Synchronization Group Number 1. Do not register CSs connected to legacy gateways to any other Air Synchronization Group Number.
Page 921 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization Index Indicates the CS number (reference only). Default Not applicable Value Range 1–16 Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization CS Name Indicates the name of the CS (reference only). Default Not applicable Value Range Max.
Page 922 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization Value Range -, Registered Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization CS Class Specifies the classification of each CS. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS. Default Not applicable Value Range...
Page 923 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization Primary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the primary CS (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization Primary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the primary CS (reference only). Default Not applicable Value Range...
Page 924 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization Secondary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the secondary CS (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization Secondary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the secondary CS (reference only).
Page 925: Pbx Configuration-[11-2-2] Maintenance-Cs Synchronization-Lan Synchronization
19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Synchronization 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Synchronization You can program and view settings for LAN Synchronization Groups. Select a LAN Synchronization Group (1-16) to program from the LAN Synchronization Group Number drop-down list. It is possible to synchronize CSs with each other within the LAN synchronization group. Click Sort to reorder CSs.
Page 926 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Synchronization PC Programming Manual References 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—Air Synchronization— Synchronization Group Number IP Address for Group Control Specifies the IP address for the group. This is the same value specified in Group Control Setting—IP Address for Group Control in 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Sync Group Setting.
Page 927 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Synchronization Default Not applicable Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Synchronization Status Indicates whether a certain CS is registered (reference only).
Page 928 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Synchronization Maintenance Console Location 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Synchronization Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only). Default Not applicable Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Synchronization PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 929: Pbx Configuration-[11-2-3] Maintenance-Cs Synchronization-Lan Sync Group Setting
19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Sync Group Setting 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Sync Group Setting You can program the settings for a LAN synchronization group. LAN Synchronization Group Number Select the LAN synchronization group to program. Default Value Range 1–16 Maintenance Console Location 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Sync Group Setting...
Page 930 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Sync Group Setting Default Value Range 0–8192 ns Maintenance Console Location 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Sync Group Setting Synchronization Level Setting—Limit level of Synchronization holding (ns) Specifies the limit for determining synchronization holding. Default Value Range 0–8192 ns Maintenance Console Location...
Page 931 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Sync Group Setting Maintenance Console Location 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronization—LAN Sync Group Setting Synchronization Monitoring Report Setting—Long Term Diagnosis Monitoring timer (h) Specifies the number of hours between performing in-operation monitoring (long term). Default 24 hours Value Range 2–168 hours...
Page 932: Pbx Configuration-[11-3] Maintenance-Power Failure Transfer
Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. The following programming items are specific to the KX-NS1000 Web Maintenance Console. Using the Site selection drop-down list, select the site where the legacy gateway PBX is connected, and then program the settings.
Page 933: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
Section 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 934: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings A maximum of 1022 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a telephone to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using Web Maintenance Console.
Page 935 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES 20.1.53 Unified Messaging—Mailbox PC Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9 Extension Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension Group number can be assigned.
Page 936: Um Configuration-[1-2] Mailbox Settings-Full Setting
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting PC Programming Manual References 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Directory Listing Feature Manual References 20.1.31 Unified Messaging—Dialing by Name Last Name Specifies the last name of the subscriber.
Page 937 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters Feature Manual References 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES 20.1.53 Unified Messaging—Mailbox PC Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9 Extension Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension Group number can be assigned.
Page 938 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Directory Listing Feature Manual References 20.1.31 Unified Messaging—Dialing by Name Last Name Specifies the last name of the subscriber.
Page 939 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Max. 16 digits Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber Feature Manual References 20.1.66 Unified Messaging—Password Administration Mailbox Password (Message Client) Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software program.
Page 940 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting • COS No. 513 and 514 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System Manager, respectively. No other mailboxes can be assigned to COS No. 513 and 514. Default Value Range COS No.
Page 941 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note Each caller’s replies to an interview session are saved as one message. Default Not stored Value Range 2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters Feature Manual References 20.1.49 Unified Messaging—Interview Service All Calls Transfer to Mailbox...
Page 942 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note When "System" is selected, the Unified Messaging system uses the extension transfer sequence pre-programmed in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—PBX Parameters— PBX Environment—Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]).
Page 943 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note When "System" is selected, the Unified Messaging system uses the time pre-programmed in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialing Parameters/MSW Notification— Dialing Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s). Default System Value Range System, Other (If "Other" is selected, specify 10–60 s) Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References...
Page 944 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when there is no answer. Click Edit for the extension to change, program the settings, and click OK to finish. Note •...
Page 945 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.46 Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service Call Transfer Anytime in Incomplete Handling Menu Specifies whether callers can input an extension number to transfer their call while the Automated Attendant service is playing an Incomplete Call Handling menu. Default Disable Value Range...
Page 946 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Default Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Manual References 20.1.60 Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type Specifies the type of message for which notification is sent. Notification can be sent for all messages, or voice messages or fax messages only.
Page 947 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note When the Unified Messaging system calls a CO line via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" after the telephone number (1112223333 in the example here): 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Pause) "X" is either the Caller ID information that was received when the message was recorded or the value of System Callback No.
Page 948 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range 0–120 min Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Manual References 20.1.60 Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min) Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when the called device does not answer.
Page 949 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Manual References 20.1.60 Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Start Delay Time (0-120 min) Specifies the length of time the system waits after a new message is received before sending message waiting notification.
Page 950 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Default Not stored Value Range Max. 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Manual References 20.1.58 Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address Specifies the e-mail address of the device.
Page 951 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.58 Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will be sent only for urgent messages. Default Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Manual References...
Page 952 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.58 Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number Specifies the callback number to be included in the notification. Default Not stored Value Range Max. 32 digits (0–9, , #) Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters...
Page 953 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.58 Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Fax File Specifies whether to attach a fax image file of fax messages to the notification e-mail. Default Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location...
Page 954 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv This tab contains programming items for External Message Delivery, Auto Forwarding, and Personal Custom Service settings. External Message Delivery Active If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilize the External Message Delivery feature. Default Value Range No, Yes...
Page 955 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.35 Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service Auto Forwarding Active If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards messages that have not been played for a specified length of time to another mailbox. Default Value Range No, Yes...
Page 956 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded. Default 0:30 Value Range 00:00–99:59 Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Manual References 20.1.4 Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding...
Page 957 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.4 Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Mode Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the original mailbox. When set to "Copy", copies of the messages are retained in the original mailbox after forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained in the original mailbox.
Page 958 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Date and time Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Manual References 20.1.4 Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding Personal Custom Service Specifies the Personal Custom Service. The System Administrator can assign an operation to each key. Note •...
Page 959 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Manual References 20.1.67 Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service Outside Numbers Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can be used for the "Transfer to outside (specified number)" operation in the Custom Service settings.
Page 960 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.67 Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF input before the action set in No DTMF Input Operation is performed.
Page 961 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Under Subscribers To Add, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add, referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’ names. Click Add. Click OK. Follow the steps below to remove members from a list. Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–4) Members item.
Page 962 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Manual References 20.1.75 Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set Auto Login Extension When this item is set to "Enable", subscribers are able to access their mailbox directly without entering the mailbox number. Subscribers can automatically log in from their extensions, by calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialing a telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or CO line.
Page 963 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2 Specifies the telephone number from which the subscriber can automatically be logged in from. When Caller ID information is received that matches one of these numbers, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox.
Page 964 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Max. 20 digits Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service Feature Manual References 20.1.8 Unified Messaging—Automatic Login Auto Login TRG No. Specifies the CO line number for Automatic Login. When the Unified Messaging system receives a call on this CO line, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox.
Page 965 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Login Toll Saver Allows subscribers to call the Unified Messaging system and know whether or not new messages have been recorded in their mailboxes by the number of rings they hear before the Unified Messaging system answers their calls.
Page 966 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting PC Programming Manual References 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service— Auto Login Extension Feature Manual References 20.1.32 Unified Messaging—Direct Service Access Fax Options Automatic Delivery Status Specifies whether Automatic Delivery is used to automatically forward received faxes to a specified fax machine.
Page 967 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Automatic Delivery Status Printed Fax Message Specifies if automatically forwarded faxes are marked as "old" or "new", or deleted. Default Save as Old Value Range Delete Automatically, Save as Old, Save as New Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Fax Options Feature Manual References 20.1.7 Unified Messaging—Automatic Fax Delivery...
Page 968 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting No Space for Receiving Coverage Mode Specifies the action taken when there is not enough free space in the mailbox to save a fax message in the mailbox. Default No Receiving Value Range Transfer to Fax Extension: Transfers the fax to a specified fax extension. Receive in GDM: The fax is redirected to the general delivery mailbox.
Page 969 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Subscriber Service - All Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in.
Page 970 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Subscriber Service - New Urgent Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages marked as urgent in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in. Default Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Receiving Message Service - All New Messages...
Page 971 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Receiving Message Service - New Fax Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new fax messages in their mailbox when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Page 972 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Quick Menu and Greeting Recording Quick Menu and Greeting Recording When this setting is enabled for the Message Manager mailbox, the following features are enabled for the Message Manager to access greeting and recording management menus quickly. •...
Page 973: Um Configuration-[1-3] Mailbox Settings-Auto Configuration
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration Auto Configuration automatically associates extension numbers and mailboxes in bulk. This feature is available at the Installer level only. Select the following options Specifies Auto configuration mode from the following. Note In Re-create all mailboxes mode, all voice data is deleted, including data that is recorded in mailboxes.
Page 974 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration Installation Manual References 5.12 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes Feature Manual References 20.1.92 Unified Messaging—Mailbox Auto Configuration PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 975: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
Section 21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 976: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to its subscriber. There are 514 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as needed. COS No.
Page 977 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Directory Listing If set to "Yes", the subscriber’s name and extension number will be listed in the directory (Dialing by Name). Note This setting is not available for COS 514 (System Manager). Default Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General...
Page 978 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Default Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Manual References 20.1.22 Unified Messaging—Call-through Service Remote Call Forward to CO Select if subscribers in the Class of Service can perform a Remote Call Forward to CO. Default Value Range Yes, No...
Page 979 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Fax Option Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can use the fax functions of the Unified Messaging system, such as sending and receiving faxes. Default Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Desktop Messaging Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can access the contents of their mailboxes with an e-mail...
Page 980 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Message Manager Authority Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service have access to the Unified Messaging system as a Message Manager. Default Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Manual References 20.1.2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES Mailbox...
Page 981 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Message Length (Limited) (min) Specifies the maximum recording time for messages left to subscribers in the Class of Service. Only specified Message Length (Selection) is set to "Limited". Default COS 1–62: 3 min COS 63–64: 60 min...
Page 982 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service New Message Retention Time (Selection) Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to new messages in mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service. If "Unlimited" is selected, new messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the subscriber. Default Limited Value Range...
Page 983 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range 1–30 days Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Message Retrieval Order Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved for subscribers in the Class of Service (played back for listening).
Page 984 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Message Envelope Setting Specifies when message envelopes (message date and time, name of the person who recorded or transferred the message, telephone number of the caller) are announced. Default After Value Range...
Page 985 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting If set to "Yes", directions for recording a message are given to the caller immediately after the personal greeting of the subscriber in the Class of Service has been played.
Page 986 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Personal Greeting for Caller ID If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can record personal greetings that are played for specific callers only (Personal Greeting for Caller ID).
Page 987 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Auto Receipt If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can request to receive confirmation when their message has been listened to by the message recipient. Default Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Manual References 20.1.5 Unified Messaging—Auto Receipt...
Page 988 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service First Playback Urgent Message If set to "Yes", the system plays urgent messages before regular messages for subscribers in the Class of Service. Default Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Manual References 20.1.91 Unified Messaging—Urgent Message Announce Message Transferred Information...
Page 989 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Announce Option Menu after Erasing Message If set to "Yes", the system plays the option menu after erasing a message for subscribers in the Class of Service. If set to "No", the system plays the next message automatically without playing the option menu. Default Value Range No, Yes...
Page 990: Call Transfer
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Default Not stored Value Range 5–200 days Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Manual References 20.1.66 Unified Messaging—Password Administration Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode Specifies whether two-way recording sessions are saved in the mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service as "old"...
Page 991 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters Use Call Waiting on Busy If set to "Yes", the system signals subscribers in the Class of Service when they are on a call and another call is received.
Page 992 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer Call Transfer to Outside If set to "Yes", the system allows calls to be transferred to a CO line via the following features: Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call Transfer Service, Personal Custom Service, Call-through Service.
Page 993 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Manual References 20.1.44 Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode Password Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their password when accessing their mailbox. Default Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode PC Programming Manual References...
Page 994 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Owner Name Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change the mailbox owner’s name when accessing their mailbox. Default Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode Feature Manual References 20.1.44 Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode...
Page 995 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Manual References 9.1.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES 20.1.44 Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode Erase When Check Out - Owner Name Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check Out"...
Page 996 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016-03...
Page 997: Um Configuration-[3] Um Extension / Trunk Service
Section 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. Document Version 2016-03 PC Programming Manual...
Page 998: Um Configuration-[3-1] Um Extension / Trunk Service-Service Group
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service Group (therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). One of 6 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service, Fax, or Transfer to Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Page 999 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Default Custom Service Menu Value Range Voice Mail Service, Automated Attendant, Interview Mailbox, Custom Service, Fax Service, Transfer to Mailbox Maintenance Console Location 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter Specifies the parameter for the type of Incoming Call Service specified.
Page 1000 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Maintenance Console Location 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language Feature Manual References 20.1.82 Unified Messaging—System Prompts Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers Specifies which language is used when a caller cannot enter any digits to select a language after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been played.

Panasonic KX-NS1000 Pc Programming Manual

1 Overview

2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen

4 Status

5 System Control

6 Tool

7 Utility

8 Users

9 PBX Configuration-[1] Configuration

10 PBX Configuration-[2] System

11 PBX Configuration-[3] Group

12 PBX Configuration-[4] Extension

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-NS1000

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-NS1000